Home

Data Sheet

1. When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save D Important f you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save Note Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen Page top Setting Holidays Page 212 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Holidays Setting Holidays You can add holidays to your calendar i za Click Set Holidays in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or click Setup Period Holiday in the Edit screen and click Set Holidays in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday Settings dialog box Pernod From 92009 to 11 2009 Holiday Marnie Set as Holiday Add Edit Delete Clear To add a holiday click Add The Add Edit Holiday dialog box appears To edit a saved holiday select it and click Edit To delete a holiday select it and click Delete To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar period click Clear k Holiday Name Set as Holiday Period From 9 2009 to 1172005 Month 7 year Day O Day of week First Sunday k Enter the name in Holiday Name and
2. The Print Settings screen of the printer driver appears a Setting Grayscale Printing 1 Select the Main tab 2 Set the Media Type and Print Quality 3 Click Grayscale Printing Fhoto Paper Fius Semi gises Laie 25x11 215 S23 FS enn 4 Setting the Color Correction 1 Click Manual for Color Intensity 2 Click Set to the right of Manual The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Select a color for grayscale using the Tone slider Center Printing Grayscale Photos from Other Applications Page 539 of 539 pages Photos are printed as if they had been taken with black and white film Cool side Photos are printed in grayscale with a cool bluish tint Warm side Photos are printed in grayscale with a warm reddish tint Manual Coler Adjustment Ah ABCDEF a 1234567 4 Click OK 9 Printing Click Print of MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to the On screen Manual Advanced Guide e White streaks may appear at the top and bottom edges of printed grayscale photos In that case print with a 45 mm 1 77 inch or more margin at the top and bottom edges relative to the printing direction Previous Page top
3. The photo orint settings will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again Saving Photos When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other How Do Print with Even Margins EE Note You can crop images or print dates on photos Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can print photos in grayscale Printing Photos in Grayscale You can specify advanced Photo Print settings number of copies print quality etc in the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click cet Settings or select Preferences from the File menu See Help for details on the Layout Print screen e Page top Creating an Album Page 116 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album Easy PhotoPrint EX Creating an Album Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enh
4. 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images a Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit te Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 158 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Sharpener Function Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click p Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance I
5. of MEMO e In Digital Photo Professional click File gt Plug in printing gt Print with Easy PhotoPrint Pro to start Easy PhotoPrint Pro Opening the Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Click Grayscale Photo 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adjustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Setting Grayscale Photo Color 1 Select a grayscale photo color in Tone Black White Photos are printed as if they had been taken with black and white film Cool Tone Photos are printed in grayscale with a cool bluish tint Warm Tone Photos are printed in grayscale with a warm reddish tint Custom Adjust the Cyan Magenta and Yellow values in Color Balance to specify the color Page 535 of 539 pages Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 536 of 539 pages 2 Click OK Printing 1 Set the Paper Size Media Type and Layout memo e White streaks may appear at the top and bottom edges of printed grayscale photos In that case print with a 45 mm 1 77 inch or more margin at the top and bottom edges If you select Bordered Margin 45 for Layout images will be reduced when printing to allow a 45 mm 1 77 inch margin at the top and bottom edges relative to the printing direction 2 Click Print of MEMO e For details on printing procedures and color balance settings refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in
6. 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Start from Period EE Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can add holidays to your calendar Setting Holidays 3 Select a layout for Design If necessary make advanced settings on the calendar and set the background EE Note You can customize the calendar display font colors of the dates and days of the week position and size of the calendar etc Setting Calendar Display You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change Background dialog box To display the Change Background dialog box click Background EE Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 130 of 539 pages Page top Selecting a Photo Page 131 of 539 pages Advanced amide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears BE New Ceda Ensy PhotoPrint EX Bile Edit view Hep Salary rages for calindar YOG can abo pinapa mapas ater n the aging process Te cores or ganhyat mages clk the ComacyEnhance DUTH ASE OS TQRTNIS pod GAN CO ITENTS in Tp QR eraan i Ee baa a EFT ae 1 aa i a r E a Hegi sji POSH Sy Inside Pagasti
7. Cool tone Default Warm tone Print images using the ICC profile specified in the software application Adobe RGB sRGB Page top Pro9000 Mark II series Advanced Guide Page 88 of 539 pages Canon MC 3613 V1 00 Basic Guide 7 Printing Printing Troubleshooting Printing from a Computer How to Use This Manual Printing with the Bundled Application Software What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Maintenance Selecting a Photo Printing This Manual madlalijaleme am DAYA DLO DE Selecting the Paper Changing the Printer Settings Printing Appendix Creating an Album When you display this on screen Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX manual in a language Selecting the Paper and Layout environment other than English Selecting a Photo some English descriptions may Editing be displayed Printing Printing a DVD CD Printing Calendars Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Stickers Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Layout Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Red Eye Correction Function Using the Face Brightener Function Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
8. Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting a Photo 3 Selecting the Paper 4 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Printing on a DVD CD gt Printing Photos in Grayscale Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers m How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from m How Do Print with Even Margins Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 109 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX Se Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selg tha mar yas Aane Te create from the many Dolch Liner fo access gaed Kemi Page top Selecting a Photo Page 110 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting a Photo Easy PhotoPrint EX
9. 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray N Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for printing the nozzle check pattern Load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it D Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 5 Clean the Print Head deeply 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Deep Cleaning gt 97 0 ee fa a a a 1 er brans Fas bg Sew ee mR rian Pa Pan ee eg ey mm ahi D Hrg Cois Saar Lisp een an r ce Eai mere ee cg Se ee rng ne beeing 3 Select the ink group to clean deeply Note f there are horizontal white streaks in the nozzle check pattern of BK R G PC or PM Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 68 of 539 pages select Group 1 If there are horizontal white streaks in the nozzle check pattern of C M or Y select Group 2 For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click Execute Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head deeply a me h ori e rire h egia Ten e noA rE gece Pe dee erg Fe a ra mae Pe ji Ri io hie io dad re eg on Demm Se OSS ee ae Pe ey Le ee
10. Any type of paper with holes Paper that is not rectangular Paper bound with staples or glue Paper with adhesives Paper decorated with glitter etc O Page top Handling Paper Page 49 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Handling Paper m Handling Paper Be careful not to rub or scratch the surfaces of any types of paper when handling Hold the paper as closely as possible to its edges and try not to touch the printing surface The print quality may be degraded if the printing surface is smudged with sweat or oil that comes from your hands Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package just before printing To avoid curling when you do not print put unused paper back into the package and keep it ona level surface And also store it avoiding heat humidity and direct sunlight O Page top Routine Maintenance Page 50 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance Routine Maintenance This section describes how to replace ink tanks when they run out of ink to clean the printer when the print result is faint or to take an action when paper does not feed properly Replacing an Ink Tank Replacing Procedure Checking the Ink Status When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply
11. 4 Select the media type of the loaded paper in Media Type Here we select Plain Paper Note f you select the wrong media type the printer may not print with the proper print quality 5 Select Rear Tray in Paper Source Note To feed paper from the Front Tray select Front Tray in Paper Source 6 Select the print quality in Print Quality Here we select Standard Note For details on the print quality refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Fite Conn Prelit sere Tl ja AANA EAA Fesin Standard ot EE Cim wo Fl Cod red a ee Pages Al E ERPE Frm 1 w I m Tari se Ai BR ge by ee i EE Criscin on T l ame Qeahie A Mada i Pacar Scores Sear Tira Fint Taakts L High oE RETTE Note For details on the printer driver functions click Question on the Quality amp Media Color Options Borderless Printing or Margin screen to view the on screen manual Advanced Guide If the on screen manual is not installed it does not appear even if Question is clicked The preview appears on the left of the dialog box to confirm the print result Some software applications may not have a preview function Start printing Page 23 of 539 pages Printing Documents Macintosh Page 24 of 539 pages Click Print to start printing Note Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print
12. About PictBridge Print Settings Page 356 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt About PictBridge Print Settings About PictBridge Print Settings Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device This section describes the PictBridge function of the printer For the print settings on a PictBridge compliant device refer to the instructions given in the device s instruction manual Note In the following description names of setting items are given according to those used in Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices Setting item names may be different depending on the brand or model of your device Some setting items explained below may not be available on some devices When you cannot change print settings on a device the printer prints images as follows Paper size 4 x 6 101 6 x 152 4 mm Paper type Photo Layout 1 up Borderless Date File No Print Not printed Image Optimize The Photo optimizer pro function will be used for optimized printing The following settings can be used when printing from a PictBridge compliant device Paper size 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 5 x 7 1 4 x 7 1 10 1 x 18 cm 2 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm A4 8 5 x 11 Letter 10 x 12 25 x 30 cm A3 A3 13 x 19 14 x 17 36 x 43 cm 1 10x15 may appear on some PictBridge compliant device 2 Hi Vision may appear on a non Canon br
13. EA Note Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected Select the Use the same image in all frames checkbox to use the same image in all the frames on the page You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings Ee Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 139 of 539 pages Advanced amide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears E ipa a she ae F netoPrind Ex Ble Edt Wew Hep Salicn Pappea for ethers Vo caa aio pad repaga rogi aber it the aout eag To conei or anhy images Chk the Comag Enhance butia ASE cn pong od GOAN COTE TS in Tp QR rgan oe Te ee Hegoi sjop POMS S Trede Pages 0 rrage s 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area EE Note To
14. Emm Protp00l teres Canaan ProggpOl teres 4 Select your printer s name in the Product list and click Maintenance Ban Printer List USE Feit o A T Provooll series Canon i Prenger The Canon IJ Printer Utility starts up Page top Sharing the Printer on a Network Page 460 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network Sharing the Printer on a Network If multiple computers are being used in the network environment you can share the printer connected to one computer with other computers The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the same E a P o Client PC Client PC e Settings on Print Server Describes the procedure for setting up a computer directly connected to a printer with a USB cable e Settings on Client PC Describes the procedure for setting up those computers that will use this printer through the network When you execute print the data is sent through the print server system to the printer os Important In case an error occurred when a document is printed by the client system to a shared printer the error message of Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed both on the client system and the print server system For regular printing Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed only on the client system Note Install the printer driver from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer on the pr
15. Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Open the printer driver setup window 1 Select Print on the File menu or the command bar in your software application The Print dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your printer s name is selected Note f another printer s name is selected click and select your printer s name 3 Click Preferences or Properties Printing Documents Windows Page 20 of 539 pages bere pee E ee E g E is J cae ree For meray 3 a es 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Select Business Document in Commonly Used Settings Note When the print object such as Business Document or Photo Printing is selected in Commonly Used Settings the items in Additional Features will be selected automatically The settings suitable for the print object such as media type or print quality will also appear When you specify two or more copies in Copies the Collate check box will be selected 2 Make sure of the displayed settings Here we make sure that Plain Paper in Media Type Standard in Print Quality A4 in Printer Paper Size and Rear Tray in Paper Source are selected Note The settings can be changed However after changing Printer Paper Size confirm that the setting for Page Size in the Page Setup sheet matches the setting set in the softw
16. e Check 2 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the Power Cord Connector of the printer then turn it back on e Check 3 Unplug the printer from the power supply then plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on after leaving it for at least 5 minutes If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Page 388 of 539 pages Adine Gules Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange When a printer error occurs the Alarm lamp flashes orange as shown below The number of flashes indicates the type of error that has occurred Count the flashes and take the appropriate action to correct the error So E B A A Note the number of flashes B Flashes repeatedly Note Alarm Lamp Is Lit Orange The printer is not ready to feed paper from the Front Tray yet Load the paper correctly in the Front Tray and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to load the paper correctly in the Front Tray Seea fieshestetse Two flashes Reload paper to the Rear Tray and press the Paper does not feed in the Rear Tray RESUME CANCEL button Three flashes If the Front Tray is closed open it The printer resumes Front Tray or Front Feed Support is printing closed Paper jams If the Front Feed Support is closed when printing from the Front Tray op
17. Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Adjust the Colors of Photo gt Adjusting Brightness Contrast Adjusting Brightness Contrast You can adjust the brightness and contrast of an image 1 Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the bottom right area of the screen E Note a See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 Click Color Adjustment in the Printer Settings window eee The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Adjust Brightness and Contrast Adjusting Brightness Contrast Page 245 of 539 pages Black Awhie Color Balance Brightness Ail m Cenlrast D Important Ifthe print result after adjusting the brightness and contrast is different from the preview image print a color pattern and adjust the colors based on the pattern m Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns The brightness contrast adjustment applies to all images to print EE Note For Brightness move the slider to the right to brighten and left to darken the image For Contrast move the slider to the right to increase and left to reduce the contrast of the image 4 Click OK Page top Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns Page 246 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Applica
18. Selecting a Photo 1 Click Photo Print from Menu The Select Images screen appears pF Mews Fhsto Print Easy PhotePrint EX File Edit View Help Select iat b prta prera To crezi a ahes ega chk the GorectEntiance bii arhe Appi comachona and erhsnevesnig i the pe prg screen Exif Print Sj ed tye e Select Paper La Print MON ajes IMIG a jpg Layoutyrrine yours STUE Sie E i 1 Pi r 4 ae t N Important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures D Important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX ZoomBrowser EX or Digital Photo Professional the folder tree area will not be displayed The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails 3 Click the image you want to print The number of copies appears as 1 below the clicked image while the selected image itself will appear in the selected image area EE Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click
19. a Fate Chapei Distal Face Smocthing CE erg U9 era rig girl ge 1 Toolbar Toolbar a Zoom In Zoom Out Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the page Full Screen Displays the entire image in Preview Compare Displays the Compare Images window You can compare the images before and after the correction enhancement side by side The image before the correction enhancement is displayed on the left and the image after the correction enhancement is displayed on the right Correct Enhance Images Window Page 169 of 539 pages 2 Task Area Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs Click Auto or Manual to display the corresponding tab Auto Tab Select to correct automatically kianil Aido FaF Fede y Con ection EZ l Wek off Srog Digia Face Siscething Cee Urre gil jeg Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos D Important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing Select this option in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click eet Settings in the Layout
20. sRGB E Printers Maximizing Your Printer s Performance in Adobe RGB Color Space As shown in the diagram above the Adobe RGB color space has a wider gamut than sRGB This printer s color space also has a wider gamut than sRGB his means that the Adobe RGB color space provides a larger color space for printing which Page 476 of 539 pages Essential Basics of Color Management Page 477 of 539 pages allows you to maximize your printer s performance For example compare the two photos below You should be able to tell the color difference between the cobalt blue seas Color differences are distinct in Adobe RGB when subjects have vivid highly saturated gamut SRGB image Adobe RGB image Some digital single lens reflex cameras support Adobe RGB If RAW mode is also supported you can edit print images using the Adobe RGB color space by processing captured images in Adobe RGB and adding ICC profile tags Check the following when printing Adobe RGB images Sta Check1 How can I check the colors of Adobe RGB images It is impossible to reproduce Adobe RGB colors on computer monitors other than those used by professionals Before you edit retouch Adobe RGB images print them using the Adobe RGB color space and check the colors lt Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro wPrinting by Utilizing the Source Color Space Printing from Other Applications
21. 5 x7 13x18cm 4 x8 101 6x203 2mm 8 x10 20x25cm 10 x12 25x30cm 14 x17 36x43cm Bordered x2 A4 Letter 8 5 x11 A3 A3 13 x19 329x483mm 11 x17 279 4x431 8mm Art Bordered x4 A4 Margin 35 Art Letter Margin 35 Art A3 Margin 35 Art A3 13x19 Margin 35 8 x10 20x25cm 10 x12 25x30cm 14 x17 36x43cm A4 Letter 8 5 x11 When Index is selected for Layout only photo information is printed When Index is selected for Layout image arrangement is automatically changed to four columns and five rows To change the print position of photo information for each image select an image and click S Change the photo information position for the image Page top Trimming Photos Page 254 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings gt Trimming Photos Easy PhotoPrint Pro Trimming Photos Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions Click ta Trimming in the Print Preview window or double click the preview image Move the white frame to the portion to crop and click OK 4 The Fule of Thirds E Note To move the cropping area place the cursor within the white frame and drag it Drag the white lines to enlarge reduce the cropping area Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines To create a balanced
22. Checking the Print Head Nozzles The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern Print the pattern if printing becomes faint or if a specific color fails to print The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows Nozzle Check 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab The Nozzle Check dialog box opens To display a list of items that you should check before printing the check pattern click Initial Check Items 3 Load paper in the printer Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray 4 Print a nozzle check pattern Make sure that the printer is on and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern is printed Click OK when the confirmation message appears The Pattern Check dialog box opens 5 Check the print result Check the print result If the print result is normal click Exit If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections click Cleaning to clean the print head Related Topic Cleaning the Print Heads Page top Cleaning Inside the Printer Page 374 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning Inside the Printer Cleaning Inside the Printer The bottom plate cleaning function allows you to prevent smudges on the back side of the paper Perform bottom plate c
23. Has the printer been printing continuously for a long period Close the Top Cover wait a while then reopen it If the printer has been printing continuously for a long time the Print Head Holder may not move to the center since the Print Head may overheat Note Opening the Top Cover while printing moves the Print Head Holder to the right Close the Top Cover and reopen it after printing finishes Page top Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 417 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed Properly e Check 1 Make sure of the following when you load paper e When loading two or more sheets of paper align the edges of the sheets before loading e When loading two or more sheets of paper make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load limit However proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature and humidity In such cases reduce the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit e Always load the paper in portrait orientation either in the Rear Tray or the Front Tray regardless of the printing orientation e When you load the paper on the Rear Tray load the paper with the print side facing UP Align the paper stack against the right side of the Rear Tray and slide the Paper Guide
24. Printing Advanced Information Trimming Photos Printing with Adjusted Print Size Saving Print Settings Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 230 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro Easy PhotoPrint Pro Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro Easy PhotoPrint Pro can be started from Adobe Photoshop or Digital Photo Professional Starting from Adobe Photoshop 1 From the File menu of Adobe Photoshop select Automate gt Canon Easy PhotoPrint Pro Easy PhotoPrint Pro starts D Important Easy PhotoPrint Pro cannot be started when no image is displayed in Adobe Photoshop f Easy PhotoPrint Pro does not appear in Adobe Photoshop s menu even after installing Easy PhotoPrint Pro follow these steps to install the Photoshop Plug In 1 Exit Adobe Photoshop 2 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Photoshop Plug In Installer 3 Follow the on screen instructions to install The Photoshop Plug In will not be installed if Adobe Photoshop has never been started f you create or edit an image in Adobe Photoshop CS3 using the layer function the image may not be displayed in Easy PhotoPrint Pro In this case combine the image and the layer in Adobe Photoshop CS3 Ee Note The images displayed in
25. Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro is section explains how to print digital camera photos in grayscale using Easy PhotoPrint Pro application supplied with this printer after opening then editing retouching them in Adobe Notoshop CS Adobe Photoshop CS2 Adobe Photoshop CS3 Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or gital Photo Professional of MEMO e Easy PhotoPrint Pro can only be started after installing Easy PhotoPrint Pro supplied with this printer on a computer on which Adobe Photoshop CS Adobe Photoshop CS2 Adobe Photoshop CS3 Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or Digital Photo Professional is installed For updated compatibility visit our website gt gt For details refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Using the XPS printer driver enables you to print in the High Dynamic Range full 16 bit workflow gt gt For details refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro 1 Open the image you want to print in grayscale in an Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible application 2 In Adobe Photoshop click File gt Automate gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Easy PhotoPrint Pro starts and the image displayed in Adobe Photoshop appears in Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro OTE te a a UN Cimen Ery Foer Pre fie View Hep peses e E SS Sa P Prot Pape Fha phas E
26. Pro9000 Mark II series Advanced Guide Page 89 of 539 pages Using the Blemish Remover Function Adjusting Images Correct Enhance Images Window Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from How Do Print with Even Margins What Is C1 or C4 Photo Print Settings Printing on a DVD CD Printing Photos in Grayscale Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files What Is Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Beautiful Photos Printing with ICC Profiles Adobe RGB sRGB Printing Edited Retouched sRGB Images Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro Selecting a Photo Selecting the Paper and Layout Printing Pro9000 Mark II series Advanced Guide Page 90 of 539 pages Adjust the Colors
27. Specifying Color Correction m Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast O Page top gt Printing with ICC Profiles Page 308 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Printing with ICC Profiles Printing with ICC Profiles If the image data has a specified input ICC profile you can effectively use the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the data when printing The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data When you print the editing and touch up results of Adobe Photoshop Canon Digital Photo Professional or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles you print by effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data To use this printing method use your application software to select color management items and specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself or one for special Canon paper from your application software be sure to select color management items from your application software For instructi
28. To delete all images from the selected image area click Delete All Imported Images Delete Imported Image To print two or more copies of an image click gS Up arrow until the number of copies you Selecting a Photo Page 111 of 539 pages want is reached To reduce the number of copies shown in the box click LY Down arrow You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Selecting the Paper Page 112 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting the Paper Selecting the Paper 1 Click Select Paper The Select Paper screen appears SS New Peete Print _ Ensy PhotePrint EX File Edit View Help Sdectihe printer douse then select the nme Seed hye of per doe prira a Fee Exif Print Prier Cann et Pager Source Gye Picts Presto sps Piol Mats Photn Paper 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Paper Source Paper Size Media Type Ee Note The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer See Help for details
29. To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save EE Note Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen Page top Opening Saved Files Page 194 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Opening Saved Files Easy PhotoPrint EX Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu EL J Easy Ph atoPrint EX Ble Edit Yiew Help GDC he Ram yA Wan De raais fnm e manija Sakar Liner To access ged Ramp The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX by icon view only for Windows Vista or thumbnail view D Important a When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Layout Print screen appears EA Note a Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format extension Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 3 Edit the file if necessary EE Note You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Double click or click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit You can also o
30. a Por A Ranee 120 dayari Feya Layout Borderless Phalo Paper Pre E 2 Ti A TE Homelaine CETE itfa Scaled Page Layout Lome BRIT 215 Sel ae Click OK when the confirmation message appears When a message prompting you to change the media type appears select a media type from the list and click OK 3 Check the paper size Check the Page Size list If you want to change select another page size from the list The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing 4 Adjust the amount of extension from the paper Adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider as necessary Borderless Printing Page 266 of 539 pages Moving the slider to the right makes the amount larger and moving the slider to the left makes the amount smaller It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases a Q ant D Important If you set the slider at the rightmost position the back side of the paper may become smudged 5 Complete the setup Click OK The data will be printed without any margins on the paper NY Important If a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected the size is automatically changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing You can execute borderless printing only when the following Media Type is selected on the Main tab Plain Paper Photo Paper Plus Glossy II Photo Paper Pro Il Photo Paper Pro Plati
31. amp f you have performed the procedure until step 3 and the problem has not been resolved turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are Misaligned See Aligning the Print Head O Page top Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 58 of 539 pages Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern m Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper Note f the remaining ink level is low the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly Replace the ink tank whose ink is low See Replacing an Ink Tank Printing the nozzle check pattern without a computer You can also print the nozzle check pattern from the printer itself using the RESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 2 Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it and pull out the Front Tray Extension If the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the Power lamp flashes green twice then release
32. cm photo paper as an example For details on Easy PhotoPrint EX refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Note The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows The operations are also the same for printing with Macintosh Install Easy PhotoPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install Easy PhotoPrint EX select Easy PhotoPrint EX in Custom Install 1 Prepare for printing 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Here we load 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 4 Pull out the Front Tray Extension Note To load paper in the Front Tray see Loading Paper in the Front Tray 2 Start Easy PhotoPrint EX and select Photo Print 1 Start Easy PhotoPrint EX Pe Double click 0 Easy PhotoPrint EX on the desktop vi Click Here Easy PhotoPrint EX acintosh Select the Go menu Applications Canon Utilities Easy PhotoPrint EX then double click Easy Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 13 of 539 pages PhotoPrint EX Note Vindows To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu double click 3 Solution Menu on the Pe desktop and click Print photos or albums etc See To Start Solution Menu To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from the Start menu select All Progra
33. gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing a DVD CD Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing a DVD CD Start Easy PhotoPrint EX and select DVD CD Label in Menu to start CD LabelPrint CD LabelPrint allows you to print DVD CD labels easily For details on how to use CD LabelPrint install CD LabelPrint and refer to the application s manual as follows From the Start menu select All Programs gt CD LabelPrint gt Manual N Important DVD CD Label is not displayed in Menu if CD LabelPrint is not installed on your computer E CD LabelPrint New Fle Edt Test pe bee Poston Settings Yew Help O S w g AS B O O ra a aaa Page top Printing Calendars Page 127 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Calendars Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on
34. select Custom Settings in the pop up menu clear the Detect paper width check box and then click Send The settings here are also applied under Direct Printing from a digital camera Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed e Check See Eleven flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action VVindows Writing Error Output Error Communication Error e Check 1 If the Power lamp is off make sure that the power plug is plugged in then turn the printer on While the Power lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green e Check 2 Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver In the following instructions XXX signifies your printer s name 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Click Control Panel then Printer under Hardware and Sound In Windows XP click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 click Control Panel then Printers 3 Right click the Canon XXX icon then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s If the port setting is not correct reinstall the printer driver or change the port setting Message Appears on the Com
35. 1 E i E a ia i i Li b E i ni i 7 im gt E LE Le i I a i E i i if e a Cs E W T _ M t F i Fak L a 2 amp BE E a TUTTE a P oe a b Bi T a id Gi E r j i i i T T T E zs t i ty La a i i i E DS E i Boo 1 1 1 r 1 a 1 La b L i i i 1 i i 4 i ke i L i i EA Note If itis difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks HAHH MAMIN F E E Less noticeable vertical white streaks F More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column V then click OK 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Load two sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Gently press the amp mark on the Front Tray to open the Front Tray and extend the Front Tray Extension 4 Print the pattern 1 Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Select Custom Settings in the pop up menu Select the Align heads manually check box then click Send Confirm the displayed message and click OK Select Test Print in the pop up menu Click Print Head Alignment Confirm the displayed message and click Align Print Head N O OF fF W PY The dialog f
36. 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area EE Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click EE Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Delete All Imported Images Page top Editing Page 132 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ege calendar a needed Paan paai add images or change Dyou Edit Tools aa Pages oE cR BAN A e rcg General Toos Mal a te esis le gt FF a be a Order x Algn Ditrbute 3s Inside Pages 2 Edit the calendar if necessary Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Pho
37. A Digital Camera a we ee gq Le a Z q hy Printer a A Scanner Display Profile Input Device Output Device Such as a scanner l such as a printer Input Profile Output Profile o4 MEMO e Are the monitor settings and usage environment appropriate The monitor settings and usage environment are important factors for correct color management Monitor calibration and ambient lighting are two of the key factors that will affect display of the correct colors Even if profiles have been set correctly images may not be displayed in the correct colors depending on the monitor settings and usage environment Check the following Bish Check Is the monitor driver or a profile for your monitor installed Check Monitors in Device Manager If standard monitor types or similar or another manufacturer s name appears download the corresponding monitor driver or profile from the website for your monitor Bish Check Are you using a fluorescent lamp designed for color evaluation Commercially available fluorescent lamps have different color temperatures and cannot be used as light sources to confirm correct colors To confirm the correct colors ona monitor it is recommended that you use D50 fluorescent lamps with high color rendering properties that reproduce colors more faithfully Et Checks Have you calibrated the monitor If colors are important to you you can calibrate the monitor by using a specialized app
38. Adobe Photoshop appear in Easy PhotoPrint Pro Starting from Digital Photo Professional 1 From the File menu of Digital Photo Professional select Plug in printing gt Print with Easy PhotoPrint Pro Easy PhotoPrint Pro starts Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 231 of 539 pages D Important Easy PhotoPrint Pro cannot be started when no image is displayed in Digital Photo Professional Note The images displayed in Digital Photo Professional appear in Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page top Selecting a Photo Page 232 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Selecting a Photo Easy PhotoPrint Pro Selecting a Photo 1 Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the bottom right area of the screen Cm hE Fial Di sa saes 18 Jan Blea Number of imager d Paper Size ad Media Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy I EE Note To increase the number of copies click Up arrow below the thumbnail in the center of the screen until the number of copies you want is reached To reduce the number of copies shown in the box click Down arrow You can select up to 99 copies per one image and 1 000 copies in total You can change the printing order by clicking FEE Specify Print Order in the Print Preview window You can resize the thumbnails by clickin
39. Aligning the Print Head Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Opening the Maintenance Screens Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Page top Replacing an Ink Tank Page 51 of 539 pages Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing an Ink Tank Replacing an Ink Tank When ink runs out while printing is in progress the Alarm lamp flashes orange four times and the error message will appear on your computer screen Make sure which ink tank has run out of ink and replace it with a new one Note When ink runs out or other errors occur the Alarm lamp flashes orange to inform you of the error Refer to Four flashes of Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide and take an appropriate action For information on the compatible ink tanks refer to the printed manual Getting Started f print results become faint or white streaks appear despite sufficient ink levels see When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect m Replacing Procedure When the ink tanks run out of ink follow the procedure below to replace them a Important Handling ink To maintain optimal print quality we recommend the use of specified Canon brand ink tanks Refilling ink is not recommended f you remove an ink tank replace it immediately Do not leave the printer with ink tanks removed Use new ink tanks for repla
40. Are Incorrect Page 57 of 539 pages Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect If print results are blurred or colors are not printed correctly the pint head nozzles are probably clogged Follow the procedure below to print the nozzle check pattern check the print head nozzle condition then clean the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory aligning the Print Head may improve print quality D Important Do not rinse or wipe the Print Head and ink tanks This can cause trouble with the Print Head and ink tanks Note Before performing maintenance Open the Top Cover and make sure that all lamps on the ink tanks are lit red If not see Checking the Ink Status and take an appropriate action Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven Step 1 See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern a After cleaning the Print Head print If there are horizontal white streaks in the pattern sp A iannesie Chace _ pattern Step 2 E See Cleaning the Print Head If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice Step 3 See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Note
41. Auto Fendeing Intent Felative Colorimetic Cook tance Hep 4 Select Linear Tone for Color Mode Printing Edited Retouched sRGB Images Page 224 of 539 pages Color Adjustment Ee arn Lolor hlanapemernt Color Mode Auto Relate Colonmetic Lok Cancel Hele 5 Click OK 6 Click Print The Print dialog box appears 7 Click OK Note You can also change the color balance brightness and contrast of the image Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Contrast Page top Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Page 225 of 539 pages Advanced auide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Beautiful Photos gt Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones You can print sRGB images using Canon Digital Photo Color EE Note Canon Digital Photo Color is Canon s unique image processing technology This technology allows you to print images in popular beautiful color tones by producing high contrast with sharp three dimensional feel while reproducing the genuine colors of the original image 1 Start Easy PhotoPrint Pro and select the photo you want to print The photo appears in the bottom right area of the screen EE Note m See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adj
42. Canon Digital Photo Color Printing from Other Applications Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Previous Next Page top Points to Check in the Digital Camera Settings Page 490 of 539 pages ital Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Points to Check in the Digital Camera Settings Points to Check in the Digital Camera Settings nis section explains shooting settings on digital cameras and differences in print results by data pe Digital Camera Settings Ihen you capture images with a digital camera the image quality is significantly affected by the umber of recorded pixels image size and the compression rate ecorded pixels image size refer to the number of pixels comprising an image recorded on a lemory card or other digital media The higher the value the higher the resolution and the better le quality of the image lowever higher value of the recorded pixels means larger file size and more time spent saving aptured images Note that if the number of pixels is set to high you may miss an opportunity to apture an important moment during sports photography for example where continuous NootiIng is required he compression rate is the rate used to compress image data in JPEG format With Canon igital cameras the compression rate increases depending whether you use SuperFine Fine or ormal The higher the compression rate the s
43. Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center e Check 5 When using paper with one printable surface make sure that the paper is loaded with the printable side facing up Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side e Check 6 Make sure that the input profile in the printer driver is set correctly If printout color of photographs that are taken in Adobe RGB mode is not satisfactory configure the input profile and then try printing again It may improve the quality of printout color 1 Open the printer properties dialog box m Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Manual for Color Intensity and then click Set 3 On the Matching sheet select ICM for Color Correction No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White
44. Color Correction 3 Select Linear Tone for Color Mode 4 Click OK Case 4 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Page 520 of 539 pages Printing Click Print f MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top Case 5 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Page 521 of 539 pages fal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Other Applications gt Case 5 g with Canon s Unique Color Tones ase 5 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones nt an SRGB image using Canon Digital Photo Color gt ndvice non Digital Photo Color allows you to print images in popular beautiful color tones This is hieved by producing high contrast with sharp three dimensional feel while reproducing the nuine colors of the original image 1 Opening an Image in an Application 1 Open the image you want to print in an application other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro Edit retouch the image as needed 2 Check that the correct ICC profile SRGB has been assigned then select the item for managing colors using ICC profiles For example in Adobe Photoshop select Printer Manages Colors for Color Handling 2 Opening the Print Settings Screen of the Printer Driver 1 Select the Print command from the application menu Example Click File gt Pri
45. Color Document in Monochrome Adjusting Tone Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver gt Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity gt Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color m Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Page top Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 297 of 539 pages Adyancedicmde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method You can set the print quality level and the halftoning method b ap ee ee e p l u ba W IE rar ie EF EE erate i j l F eS e E E a i y The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the print quality Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab and click Set Pita Pager Fro ff Lesa 85211 215 S279 4em 3 Setting the print quality
46. Completed Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Paper Jams Pro9000 Mark II series Advanced Guide Page 92 of 539 pages Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed Error Regarding the Rear Tray or Front Tray Is Displayed Error Regarding the Width of Paper Is Displayed Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Error Number 92 Is Displayed Error Number 93 Is Displayed Error Number 300 Is Displayed Error Number 1281 Is Displayed Error Number 1283 Is Displayed Error Number 1284 Is Displayed Error Number 1320 Is Displayed Error Number 1321 Is Displayed Error Number 1700 Is Displayed Ink Info Number 1600 Is Displayed Ink Info Number 1683 Is Displayed Ink Info Number 1688 Is Displayed Error Number 1851 Is Displayed Error Number 1856 Is Displayed Error Number 2001 Is Displayed Error Number 2002 Is Displ
47. Fax Extended Survey Program Click the Turn on button to restart the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Page top For Windows Users Page 431 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt For Windows Users For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed e Check Is the printer status monitor enabled Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor 1 Open the printer properties dialog box m Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows 2 On the Maintenance sheet click View Printer Status 3 Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected Page top Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 432 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device and the countermeasures to clear them Note This section describes errors that are indicated on Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices The error messages and operations may vary depending on the device you are using For errors on non Canon PictBridge compliant devices check the status of the Alarm lamp and take the appropriate action to clear the error For details see Alarm Lamp Flashes Oran
48. Head Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray then go to 3 in step 5 1 Make sure that the power is turned on Cleaning the Print Head 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray NY Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for printing the nozzle check pattern Load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it D Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box See Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 5 Clean the Print Head 1 Make sure that Cleaning is selected in the pop up menu 2 Click Cleaning i krian Ars Clgricg Freen pape eee derep piriitg Bole Line Eeecuhet print tebar cheating Sar ert pas lee ih Qasr 3 Select the ink group to clean Note f there are horizontal white streaks in the nozzle check pattern of BK R G PC or PM select Groupi If there are horizontal white streaks in the nozzle check pattern of C M or Y select Group2 For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click OK The printer starts cleaning the Print Head when the Power lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 1 minu
49. IMGQ00Isiog maiiba siss Ll Ty Tp Be A moaAATA eiea Sh Hgt iare r S Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add Image dialog box and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right EE Note Click an image to select it background turns blue or deselect it background turns white You can also select multiple images Select an option for Add to and click OK D Important You can add up to 20 images at one time to a single page Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all pages combined You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time Add it one at a time When the number of pages increases due to added images you cannot add images beyond page 400 EE Note Inthe Add Image dialog box you can select all images at one time or change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Page top Swapping Positions of Photos Page 202 of 539 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Swapping Positions of Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Swapping Positions of Photos You can swap the positions of images Swap Image Positions in the Edit screen Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may
50. Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers The feed roller cleaning function allows you to clean the paper feed roller Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly The procedure for cleaning the feed rollers is as follows r Roller Cleaning 1 Prepare the printer Remove all sheets of paper from the paper source from which paper could not be properly fed 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Roller Cleaning dialog box opens 4 Select Rear Tray or Cassette and click OK The confirmation message appears 5 Execute paper feed roller cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and click OK Paper feed roller cleaning starts 6 Complete paper feed roller cleaning After the rollers have stopped follow the instruction in the message load three sheets of plain paper into the selected paper source of the printer and click OK Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed Page top gt Aligning the Print Head Position Page 367 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Aligning the Print Head Position Aligning the Print Head Position Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print h
51. Meem texi add magas of change Grout Edit Tools inside Pages ea ass Ed Cc 2 Edit your album if necessary Changing Layout Changing Background m Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos m Adding Text to Photos D Important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited album It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again The page numbers on the front and back covers of the aloum are displayed as follows C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover C3 Inside the back cover C4 Back cover Saving Editing Page 123 of 539 pages Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 124 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Printing Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears gt Mew Album Eary PhotoP EX Hile Edt Yew Help Check Hum er gatti 5 Ci the Pring Boston fo pring with the gameng pemingi Printing starts Prente Canon 3000 Cpap Paper gio ad Pagar Soca Meda Typa Photo Paper Pius Glossy Il r Pring galg KE Page eho Pe
52. Page 234 of 539 pages 286 JUa a ha Number of imager d Paper Size Ad Media Type Photo Paper Pius isicasy I D Important When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type and Bordered full is selected for Layout the print result may be soft In that case change Media Type or Layout and print again EE Note The layouts may vary depending on the printer paper size and media type EE Note For borderless photos and index prints you can make advanced settings such as the amount of extension and the arrangement of images After selecting a layout click Set that appears to the right of Layout m When you select Bordered full for Layout you can specify the print size and amount of margin m Printing with Adjusted Print Size You can also change the color balance brightness and contrast of the image m Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Contrast O Page top Printing Page 235 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Printing Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing 1 Click Print EEL Can Dakin h E Canen Eesy PhetePrng Pro z The Print dialog box appears EA Note You can change the printing order by clicking FEE Specify Print Order in the Print Preview window 2 Click OK w Important f An error occurred during
53. Photos Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display gt Setting Holidays m Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers m How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 128 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX a Easy PhotoPrint EX lt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selg tha mar yas Aane Te create from the many Dolch Liner fo access gaed Kemi Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 129 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Calendar from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Fie Edt View Help Spey DESE S26 aii n penal Settings then galery a degn Chex fhe butten ae the bottien fo Cuamerde caknidar ceenants Afg BDeOr yg Pagar poe gbe pegad fo fhe gaet Images araen Sonera Seting Pipe Soe lOnentaton A Lavcecage Grace fort TEA Parad acm month s Inside Pages li SAT ce Baigrund
54. Photos m Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers m How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 137 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint Ex gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selg tha mar yas Aane Te create from the many Dolch Liner fo access gaed Kemi Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 138 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Stickers from Menu The Page Setup screen appears File Edt Yew Help Sgert paa e aig n Genan Santings then select a Byout Afer poept ng DREN pae att proegad to the gaer Images raan Sonera Seting Paper Sie Phote Suckers Mert date Bate Settings eager AJ E Porras AJ Landeapa PM Use the came mage in al fames 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date Use the same image in all frames
55. Pk H Se TH E TH T 08s prie amea merar Er ee ae ee ir agr Pe P Le Ct a br erred See ee ee ees ee ee ees Eer Sea Pra rE T Page 62 of 539 pages aii gapmi a Aiii of be Pods j palati hed lbi gased pakia Peat Che ip E L L E L p a a a a a a La a i i m G A Db gered pod be eerie Pe pair ie prira Pet ric ae Be ee Disb Vras ep San peed hrad nessis ur ti a app rhe Sire EHH ee Ti paims yma aa ae i poe ere ae Odli H bbe pele pads ee ee eer ere Per Copa gy H HEH A A TEER i pe og 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray Follow the procedure from 3 in step 5 Windows or Macintosh in Cleaning the Print Head to clean the Print Head Go to Select the ink group to clean in Cleaning the Print Head Go to Select the ink group to clean in Cleaning the Print Head O Page top Cleaning the Print Head Page 63 of 539 pages Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head m Cleaning the Print Head Clean the Print Head if there are horizontal white streaks in the printed nozzle check pattern Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition Cleaning the Print Head consumes ink so clean the Print Head only when necessary You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper Cleaning the Print Head without a computer You can also clean the Print Head print
56. STS 4m The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Select color correction Click Matching tab select Color Correction setting suited to your purpose from the following and click OK Specifying Color Correction Page 304 of 539 pages Driver Matching By using Canon Digital Photo Color you can print SRGB data with color tints that most people prefer Driver Matching is the default setting for Color Correction ICM You can print by using the color space of SRGB or Adobe RGB data effectively None The printer driver does not perform color adjustment Select this value if you are specifying an individually created printing ICC profile or a printing ICC profile for soecial Canon paper in an application software to print data 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified color adjustment method D Important If ICM is disabled in the application software ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable Related Topics Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Page top gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Page 305 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing fr
57. Sout _ Case ff Printing by bestir on COC Tee 3 Ponting fom piesa ini Documents Containing Any Keyword ao Basie Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Cyro Sc See penes Or ac We See e Bac Gude amjud of his product nyn ee ee m m i Gescibes the summary of this Descioes Tie detailed function 1 Click sea The Search pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual Note Click to close or display the Search pane 2 Enter a keyword In Keyword enter a keyword for the item to be checked If you want to enter multiple keywords insert a space between the keywords Note You can enter up to 10 keywords or up to 255 characters Uppercase and lowercase are not discriminated The program can also search for keywords that contain spaces 3 Click Start Searching The search is started and the titles of topics containing the keyword are displayed in the search results list When you execute a search by entering multiple keywords the search results are displayed as shown below Documents Containing Perfect Match Topics containing the entire search character string including spaces exactly as entered perfect match Documents Containing All Keywords Topics containing all keywords that were entered Using Keywords to Find a Topic Page 100 of 539 pages Documents Containing Any Keyword Topics containing at least one of the keyw
58. Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Use the CD R Tray supplied with this printer E is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 2 Is the DVD CD placed on the CD R Tray Place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer E is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray CD R Tray Does Not Feed Properly e Check 1 Is the CD R Tray placed properly Properly place the CD R Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer E is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 2 Unrecognizable DVD CD may be placed Canon recommends that you use DVD CDs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer e Check 3 Is the DVD CD on the CD R Tray already printed If you place a DVD CD on which has already been printed on the CD R Tray the CD R Tray may be ejected In this case change the settings of the printer driver and try printing again Windows e Clear the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box in Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab then click Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc i
59. Windows Vista only 1 Start Easy PhotoPrint Pro and select the photo you want to print The photo appears in the bottom right area of the screen EE Note m See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adjustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Click the Color Management tab Color Adjustment Correction Color Management Colu Mode Eneble IOC Profile Pinte Profle Auto Rendedig Interit Felative Coloiimetiic 0K 5 Caneel Hele 4 Select Ambient Light Correction for Color Mode Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Page 228 of 539 pages Color Adjustment P Correction Color Management at Ambient Light High Color Rendeting Fluorescent lamp OOD OK Caneel Help 5 Select the lighting ambient light in the place where you use the prints from Ambient Light Note From Ambient Light you can select the following lighting options High Color Rendering Fluorescent lamp 6500K High Color Rendering Fluorescent lamp 5000K High Color Rendering Fluorescent lamp 3000K Triphosphor Fluorescent lamp 6500K Triphosphor Fluorescent lamp 5000K Triphosphor Fluorescent lamp 4000K Triphosphor Fluorescent lamp 3000K Normal Fluorescent lamp 4000K The name may vary depending on your fluorescent lamp High color rendering fluorescent lamp Lamp
60. above and that we cannot disclose any collected information click Agree Otherwise click Do not agree If you wish to turn off this program click Turn off This will disable the program and no further survey will be made C Tunoff e If you agree to participate in the survey program Click Agree then follow the on screen instructions The printer usage information will be sent to Canon via the Internet If you have followed the on screen instructions the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again Note Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 430 of 539 pages If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box the information will not be sent automatically from the second time onward and the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey e If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again three months later e To stop sending the information Click Turn off The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is stopped and the information will not be sent To resume the survey see Changing the setting e To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 1 Stop the Ink
61. access our web site through the Internet and download the latest Printer Driver for your model The procedure for installing the downloaded Printer Driver is as follows 1 Turn off the printer a Important If you turn on the computer while the printer is on the Windows Plug and Play function is executed automatically and the Found New Hardware window Windows Vista or Found New Hardware Wizard window Windows XP Windows 2000 is displayed In this case click Cancel 2 Start the installer Double click the icon of the downloaded file The installation program starts NY Important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue If you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning 3 Install the driver At the Welcome window click Next Read the contents of the License Agreement window After checking the contents click Yes Installation of the printer driver begins After the Installation Complete window is displayed check that the printer and the computer are connected through a cable To select the connection port for your printer manually check t
62. and check the print result before printing The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab gi a om oe i L S Pita Pager Fro ff Leer B11 215 S279 4m 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Canon lJ Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing Related Topic m Canon IJ Preview Page top Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 294 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size You can specify the height and width of paper if its size cannot be selected in Page Size Such a paper size is called a custom size The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab 1 Set the custom size in the application software On your application s paper size feature specify your custom size N Important Ifthe application software that created the document has a function for specifying the height and width values use the application software to set the values If the application software does no
63. as long as it is compliant with the PictBridge Standard Note PictBridge is the standard to print your photos directly without using a computer connecting a device such as a digital still camera digital camcorder or camera equipped mobile phone M PictBridge A device with this mark is PictBridge compliant With some Canon brand Single Lens Reflex cameras that are PictBridge compliant you can select a desired color mode and make detailed color adjustments For details on the color mode refer to the on screen manual Digital Photo Printing Guide or the instruction manual supplied with your Canon brand PictBridge compliant device Printable image data format This printer accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system Exif 2 2 2 21 compliant O Page top Solution Menu and My Printer Page 29 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Other Usages gt Solution Menu and My Printer Solution Menu and My Printer Using Solution Menu or My Printer you can easily get the information on the printer or change the print settings by only clicking buttons on a screen With Solution Menu you can start the software applications supplied with the printer or display the operating instructions It also provides you with the information on troubleshooting With My Printer you can display the printer driver setup window It also provides you with the information on how to take an acti
64. box opens Opening the Print Dialog Box Open the Print dialog box to specify print settings before printing 1 Select Print on the File menu in your application program The Print dialog box opens Page top Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh To open the Canon lJ Printer Utility follow the procedure below In Mac OS X v 10 5 x 1 Select System Preferences on the Apple menu 2 Click Print amp Fax 3 Select your printer s name in the Printers and click Open Print Queue The job list of your printer is displayed 4 Click Utility eoo pe i T Printer Ready Slats Mame Uer When Completed The Printer List opens 5 Select your printer s name in the Product list and click Maintenance USB p a Tyo perier Canon I Printer r A Se eae ee aa The Canon lJ Printer Utility starts up In Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 Page 458 of 539 pages Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh Page 459 of 539 pages 1 Select Applications on the Go menu 2 Double click the Utilities folder and then double click the Printer Setup Utility icon The Printer List opens 3 Select your printer s name in the Name list and click Utility 69A Printer List cc Mak Default Mame
65. can arrange a photo across the left and right pages You can also select the size and orientation CHECK PRPS PPP ee Select a theme background design to create a single themed album Decorate Items with Text and Frames You can add text and frames to photos Attach a description of the photo in an album and add a frame to enhance the photo s atmosphere Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 466 of 539 pages E X F F HH ee O E m O E O CHECK PRPS PPP PEE ee Select Album to add text and frames You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos Create calendars easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create your own calendar using your favorite photos It ll be exciting to turn the calendar pages You can also create 2 month 6 month and 12 month You can use all kinds of photos calendars Create Stickers Create stickers easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends CHECK PRPS PPP You can add text to photos Page top About Solution Menu Page 467 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt About Solution Menu About Solution Menu Quick Shortcut Solution Menu Solution Menu is a menu window that provides quick access from your desktop to Canon applications manuals and online product information Canon Solution Men
66. can print using the ambient light correction function if you print from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Previous Next Page top Printing from Other Applications Page 485 of 539 pages al Photo Printing Guide Canon hoto Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Other Applications Which application do you want to print from s Printing from Other Applications Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application Printing from Other Applications Page 486 of 539 pages Capture Operations in applications RAW data Process in a specialized application Edit retouch the image using the application Want to print by utilizing Want to print by the source color space specifying an ICC profile Adobe RGB or sRGB within the application Set the input profile set the input profile Color Handling Photoshop Manages Colors Printer Profile Specify the profile for printing Black Point Compensation Clear the checkbox Printer driver settings Matching tab Calor Correction None Print Option Adjust Color Balance Brightness Intensity and Contrast for prints Printing from Other Applications Page 487 of 539 pages Detailed Operations When you want to print by utilizing the color space of the source ICC profile Adobe RGB or SRGB Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printi
67. cannot be loaded in the Rear Tray 5 Feeding this paper from the Front Tray can damage the printer Always load in the Rear Tray 6 We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet from the Front Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration 7 When loading paper in stacks the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed properly In this case load one sheet at a time 8 If you are using Fine Art Paper Museum Etching or Fine Art Paper Premium Matte you cannot print in the 1 38 inches 35 mm margin on the top and bottom edges according to the direction of printing If you select a special page size for Fine Art Paper in the printer driver a limit is set to prevent printing in the 1 38 inches 35 mm margin on the top and bottom edges of the paper We recommend checking the printing area in the preview screen before printing For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Canon genuine media is produced and managed to get optimal print quality We recommend using Canon genuine media 9 Feeding this paper from the Rear Tray can damage the printer Always load in the Front Tray 10 You can easily specify print settings for sticker paper with Easy PhotoPrint EX provided on the Setup CD ROM Install it on your computer Non Canon genuine specialty paper Loading paper Load one sheet at a time in both the Rear Tray and the Front Tray D Important f you
68. change the page placement order Page Border To print a page border around each document page check this check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order Page top Poster Printing Page 273 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Poster Printing Poster Printing The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data divide it into several pages and print these pages on separate sheets of paper When the pages are pasted together they form a large print like a poster The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows Setting Poster Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set poster printing Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the printer driver Gers e a Orenteton A Gt Pera A ungaa Rete 180 degrens EBS Ferter Fogar Size Lotier 35x117 Fma le Foe kl E BO i Piao Faper Fro E Bodsiess Fiofa Seed Pelo EE basa pral T liaan 3 Selec
69. click OK e Check 11 Is the paper scratched by other loaded paper Depending on the media type the paper may be scratched by other loaded paper when feeding from the Rear Tray In this case load one sheet at a time Page top Back of the Paper Is Smudged Page 408 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Back of the Paper Is Smudged Back of the Paper Is Smudged e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the printer Cleaning Inside the Printer EE Note When performing duplex printing or too much printing the inside may become stained with ink Page top Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 409 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven ee ee ee ee a a a a a a a a a ee a Colors Are Streaked e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check P
70. composition drag any of the intersecting points white squares or white broken lines over the main subject of the photo The cropping effect applies only to the print result The original image will not be cropped Page top Printing with Adjusted Print Size Page 255 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings gt Printing with Adjusted Print Size Printing with Adjusted Print Size Click ia Specify Print Size in the Print Preview window to adjust the print size and amount of margin before printing 0 00 208 22 0 00 286 32 2 933 955 5 04 3296 D Important Set Printer Paper Size and Layout before changing the values in Scale Height etc in the Set Print Size dialog box If you change Printer Paper Size or Layout after changing the values the original values return To return the Scale Height and other values in the Set Print Size dialog box to the original values set the number of copies below the thumbnail to 0 then specify the number again EE Note Print size can be adjusted only when Bordered full is selected for Layout Margins can be adjusted only when the image is cropped Page top Saving Print Settings Page 256 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Easy PhotoPrint P
71. delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click EE Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Delete All Imported Images Page top Editing Page 140 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ege stekers 35 naadad gat paat add imaga or change Dyou Inside Pages Eie Tomi Sa 2 Edit the stickers if necessary Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos D Important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited stickers It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again Saving E Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 141 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Printing Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears WEPre
72. e Macintosh and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Adobe Adobe Photoshop Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB 1998 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries e Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Canon Inc Exif Print This machine supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the camera s image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Page top Printing from a Computer Page 104 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer Printing from a Computer s gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Page top Printing with the Bundled Application Software Page 105 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with the Bundled Application Software What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Creating an Album Printing a DVD CD gt Printing Calendars m gt Printing Stickers Printing Layout Correcting and Enhancing Photos Questions and Answers Photo Print Settings Other Settings What Is Easy Ph
73. from the power supply then remove the foreign object e Check 7 Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed completely Paper does not feed properly if the Inner Cover is even slightly open Overview of the Printer e Check 8 Clean the Paper Feed Roller m Routine Maintenance Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary Page top Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Page 419 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver e Check Is the paper source setting inconsistent between the application program and the printer driver Change the application software setting corresponding to the printer driver setting or click the Print Options on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver and select Disable the paper source setting of the application software on the Print Options screen When the paper source setting is inconsistent between an application program and the printer driver the application software setting takes precedence Page top Paper Jams Page 420 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams Paper Jams Note If you need to turn off the printer to remove jammed paper during printing press the RESUME CANCEL
74. g Paes een cess or Fhe pec oor ge el oe ee TRETI Se Pe dm hme gee ele mii hej miimi ee Fe mn hee ores hre ringgri Conca Vin Oh Bem 4 5 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The printer starts cleaning the Print Head deeply when the Power lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the deep cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 2 minutes 6 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Check the printed nozzle check pattern See step 1 in Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern lf a particular color is not printed properly replace the ink tank of that color See Replacing an Ink Tank If the problem is not resolved open the Top Cover to confirm that the ink is remaining turn off the power then clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center _acintosh 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray NY Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for printing the nozzle check pattern Load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper cent
75. head nozzles of all ink colors from the printer itself using the RESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the Power lamp flashes green once then release it immediately The printer starts cleaning the Print Head When the Power lamp is lit green after flashing the cleaning will be completed Print the nozzle check pattern to check the print head condition after cleaning See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Windows If you click Cleaning on the Pattern Check dialog box that appears after printing the nozzle check pattern the printer starts cleaning the Print Head Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray then go to 3 in step 5 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray D Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for printing the nozzle check pattern Load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it D Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 5 Clean the Print Head 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Cleaning Cleaning the Print Head Page 64 of 539 pages ria rsa Pas Lari E E a Se d bea TS a Ps
76. later Supported Image File Formats Extensions e BMP bmp e JPEG jpg jpeg e TIFF tif tiff e PICT pict pct e Easy PhotoPrint image files epp D Important When selecting an image if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder the image may not be displayed correctly or Easy PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format In such cases move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different file format and then select the folder again Note f The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as Question Mark When Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional all image files supported by Digital Photo Professional will be displayed File Formats Extensions Supported by Easy PhotoPrint EX e Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 e Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 e Easy PhotoPrint EX Stickers file el2 e Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file e14 e Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 e CD LabelPrint data cld Page top Printing Photos Page 108 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts You can also create borderless photos easily Corrections suitable for photos will be applied automatically when printing
77. loading paper Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size or Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver Loading Paper in the Front Tray Page 43 of 539 pages see Printing Documents Windows or Printing Documents Macintosh To print continuously To print from the Front Tray again return to 3 in step 3 and load paper in the Front Tray Then start printing Returning the Front Tray to Its Normal Printing Position When using the Rear Tray set the Front Tray to its normal printing position a Important Be sure to follow the procedure below when returning the Front Tray to its normal printing position Otherwise the printer may be damaged When the Front Tray is set to the front paper feeding position printing by using the Rear Tray is not possible Be sure to set it to its normal printing position 1 Hold the Front Tray and slowly tilt it like you are closing it Tilting the Front Tray lowers it to its normal printing position 2 Open the Front Tray 1 Open the Front Tray to return it to its normal printing position 2 Make sure that the Front Feed button is not lit O Page top Media Types You Can Use Page 44 of 539 pages Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Can Use m Media Types You Can Use Choose paper suitable for printing for the best print results Canon provides you various types of paper to enhance the fun of print
78. lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EE Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Adjust 4 Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level The following adjustments are available Brightness Contrast Sharpness Blur Show through Removal Adjusting Images Page 167 of 539 pages Comcvinvence Shaha Pera pP Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save adjusted images as new files Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for adjusted images 6 Click Exit NY Important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images Page top Correct Enhance Images Window Page 168 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Correct Enhance Images Window Easy PhotoPrint EX Correct Enhance Images Window You can correct enhance images in this window To display the Correct Enhance Images window click p Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print AD Abba Phas Fix T ae inh Ep
79. menu in the Print dialog box and select Front Tray from Paper Source Then load the paper in the Front Tray and try printing again e Check 3 Is the paper size that cannot feed from the Front Tray selected in the printer driver Select the paper source correctly and try printing again Click Cancel Printing in the dialog box that is displayed Then select Rear Tray from Paper Source on the Main sheet in the printer driver Load the paper in the Rear Tray and try printing again Click Delete Job in the dialog box that is displayed Select Quality amp Media from the pop up menu in the Print dialog box and select Rear Tray from Paper Source Then load the paper in the Rear Tray and try printing again e Check 4 Is the paper loaded correctly in the Front Tray Press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to clear the error and then load the paper correctly in the Front Tray according to the procedure described in Loading Paper and try printing again e Check 5 Is the Front Tray up when printing from the Rear Tray starts Return the Front Tray to its normal printing position make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to resume printing Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to return the Front Tray to its normal printing position e Check 6 If the Front Tray is pulled up while printing from the Rear Tray return the Front Tray to its normal printing position then
80. of 539 pages ital Photo Printing Guide Canon 1 Photo Printing Guide gt Printing in Grayscale gt Printing Digital Photos in Grayscale Printing Digital Photos in eN Grayscale Ais printer allows you to print full color digital photos in grayscale or more details refer to Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro or Printing irayscale Photos from Other Applications s Printing Rewarding Grayscale Photos onventional printers even use color ink to print black and gray for grayscale printing This has ometimes caused color inconsistency in grayscale photos his printer uses black and gray inks for grayscale printing together with the minimum amount of olor ink required This prevents color inconsistency in grayscale photos addition you can print grayscale photos with a cool bluish tint or a warm reddish tint Photo printed as if it had been taken with black and white film Yriginal full color image Grayscale photo with a cool bluish tint Printing Digital Photos in Grayscale Page 533 of 539 pages Printing Procedures Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Grayscale Photos from Other Applications Next Page top Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 534 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing in Grayscale gt Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro
81. of Media Type 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select Driver Matching for Color Correction Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 307 of 539 pages 6 Select Color Mode e To print using Canon Digital Photo Color Select Standard The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer reproducing colors of the original image data and producing three dimensional effects and high sharp contrasts e To print data by directly applying the editing and touch up results of the application software Select Linear Tone When printing the data the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark black and bright white areas while leaving the darkest blackest and brightest whitest areas intact When printing the data the printer applies fine adjustment results such as brightness adjustments made with an application software 7 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 8 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
82. of an item to display a description of the linked dialog box e To see a description for each item Right click the item you want to learn about and then click Help Alternatively if the Help button is found at the right end of the title bar click that button and then click the item you want to learn about A description of the item is displayed Related Topic How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page top How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 331 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows Note This guide mainly describes operations on the Windows Vista Operations may differ depending on versions of the Windows Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing 1 Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer driver setup window appears Note Depending on ap
83. of the digital print The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Noise Reduction Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the level Photo Fapa Fro F Latter 65 11 215 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced EE Note It is recommended to select Normal for most cases Select Strong if you have selected Normal and the noise still bothers you Depending on application software or resolution of image data effects of digital camera noise reduction may not be obvious When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras image may be distorted Reducing Photo Noise Page 327 of 539 pages Page top Overview of the Printer Driver Page 328 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Overview of the Printer Driver Overview of the Printer Driver Canon IJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Preview Page top Printer Driver Operations Canon Printer Driver Operations MA 5158 V1 00 Page 329 of 539 pages Instructions for Use Printer Driver How t
84. pages A ABCDEF a 1234567 D Important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image is printed with the adjusted contrast Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Page top Simulating an Illustration Page 320 of 539 pages Advancediomide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Simulating an Illustration Simulating an Illustration With the Simulate Illustration function you can print full color or 256 color image data so that it looks like a hand drawn illustration You can add different effects to the original profile and colors The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the Simulate Illustration Check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab and adjust the Contrast as necessary Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the image data The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the printer driver Photo Paper Pro f Letter 8 3 11 215 2 79 dem 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you
85. paper tears inside the printer or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center In other cases Make sure of the following e Check 1 Are there any foreign objects around the Paper Output Slot e Check 2 Are there any foreign objects in the Rear Tray If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the printer unplug it from the power supply then remove the foreign object e Check 3 Is the paper curled Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl Page top Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 422 of 539 pages dvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed m Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed Error Regarding the Rear Tray or Front Tray Is Displayed Error Regarding the Width of Paper Is Displayed Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed ep KUA Writing Error Output Error Communication Error MEET Error Number 92 Is Displayed p MET Error Number 93 Is Displayed ap MEETEN Error Number 300 Is D
86. pease Fu wists h rid i a Edit F poderea Prerna A memory of summer 2 Print Settings 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EE Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print Ee Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Printing Page 125 of 539 pages Page top Printing a DVD CD Page 126 of 539 pages advanced Guide Advanced Guide
87. place a Important Do not raise this lever after installing the Print Head 23 Print Head Holder Install the Print Head Note For details on installing the Print Head and ink tanks refer to the printed manual Getting Started Page 10 of 539 pages Page top Printing Photos Documents Page 11 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing Photos Documents Printing Photos Documents This section describes how to print documents or photos You can easily print photos taken with your digital camera by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with your printer This section also introduces the supplied plug in application Easy PhotoPrint Pro that provides photo editing and printing with optimal reproduction of image color and quality Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Macintosh For Mac OS X v 10 5 x For Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 Page top Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 12 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing Photos Documents gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Print image data saved on your computer by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with your printer This section describes the procedure using the settings to print borderless photos on 4 x 6 10 x 15
88. press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer and try printing again Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to return the Front Tray to its normal printing position Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 424 of 539 pages Do not move the Front Tray during printing e Check 7 If the Front Tray is pulled down while printing from the Front Tray return the Front Tray to the Front Paper Feeding Position then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer and try printing again Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to return the Front Tray to its normal printing position Do not move the Front Tray during printing Error Regarding the Width of Paper Is Displayed e Check Make sure that the Page Size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the printer Press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to clear the error Then check the Page Size setting in the Page Setup sheet Windows or the Page Setup dialog box Macintosh in the printer driver and load paper that is the same size as the setting and try printing again lf this message appears even when the paper loaded in the printer is the same as the setting set the printer driver not to detect the width of the paper Select the Detect paper width check box again once printing is complete and then click Send a Tg The Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet clear the Detect paper width check box and then click Send In the Canon IJ Printer Utility
89. printer driver setup window 2 Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Deep Cleaning 3 Execute deep cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute Click OK when the confirmation message appears Print head deep cleaning starts 4 Complete deep cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check Cleaning the Print Heads Page 365 of 539 pages process click Cancel a Important Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer s ink supply Consequently perform cleaning only when necessary Note If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning switch off the printer wait 24 hours and then perform Deep Cleaning again If there is still no sign of improvement the ink may have run out or the print head may be worn For details on the remedial action to be taken see Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Related Topic Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page top Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 366 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt
90. printer driver setup window 2 Set duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab A IETENETTTEYYTFTETEFEYTTYETETETTETEEYYTTTrEETETTETETYITTTTTTTINYTTETSTTTTFETTETTETETTTTTTTTTTTTT 3 r a y a a Mag Preferehe et up a Etocs fl Martenance E Page Se Letier 7 anil himinin a i Perm Ejere 180 depress al F z Same pi Page Size Pape Layout homai a E H a g Hommaa Erden FitcFPage Scaled Page Layout Pig Pager Lomer 05211 215 lea 3 Select the layout Select Normal size or Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list 4 Specify the side to be stapled The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best Staple Side If you want to change the setting select another value from the list 5 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the width of the stapling margin and then click OK 6 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper When the printing of one side is complete set the paper correctly by following the message and click OK The document will be printed on the opposite side Duplex Printing Page 279 of 539 pages a Important Duplex Printing is unava
91. printing Memory may be insufficient for printing appears while printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro started from Adobe Photoshop increasing the memory allocation for Adobe Photoshop may solve the problem ES Note m Select the XPS printer driver for Printer to print in the High Dynamic Range full 16 bit workflow See XPS Printer Driver for details on the XPS printer driver You can print photos in grayscale or crop photos You can also print in various styles including index prints and contact sheets gt Printing Photos in Grayscale Trimming Photos Printing Borderless Photos m Printing an Index m Printing Contact Sheets Printing Advanced Information Page top Adjust the Colors of Photo Page 236 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Adjust the Colors of Photo Adjust the Colors of Photo gt Printing Photos in Grayscale Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Adjusting Brightness Contrast Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns Page top Printing Photos in Grayscale Page 237 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Adjust the Colors of Photo gt Printing Photos in Grayscale Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Photos in Grayscale You can print color photos in graysca
92. s name in Printers and click Open Print Queue The list of print jobs appears 3 Click Utility The Printer List dialog box appears Opening the Maintenance Screens 4 Select your printer s name in the Product list and click Maintenance The Canon IJ Printer Utility starts up Note When you are using Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 Follow the procedure below to open the Canon lJ Printer Utility Select Applications from the Go menu double click the Utilities folder then double click Printer Setup Utility to open the Printer List dialog box Select your printer s name in the Name list and click Utility then select your printer s name in the Product list and click Maintenance The Canon IJ Printer Utility starts up For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Ciria useeried ered ges eed liei n Ha pari ee Dp Clearing aa Liectege acain ikai comma be ceed by regulai Cee Baan Are Cloricg Pree pipt midge dereg pririitg Aster Linar 1 j Eeniutei priri tobar coating So ere pas leet iy Page 80 of 539 pages Page top Appendix Page 81 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Appendix Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page top Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Page 82 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Appendix gt Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and U
93. select Canvas or Board Paper in Media Type in the printer driver always load the paper in the Front Tray The paper cannot be fed from the Rear Tray Printer driver settings and paper source p a Paper Source Characteristics Media Type PIE SUE Front Media Types You Can Use Page 46 of 539 pages Tray Paper that has the texture of Other Fine Art Art XX Margin 35 Available 2 Available drawing paper Paper mm 1 Paper that has a texture like Canvas Art XX Margin 35 Unavailable Available canvas mm 1 Board Paper Thick paper Board Paper 3 Art XX Margin 35 Unavailable Available From 23 mil 0 6 mm to 47 mil 1 2 mm 1 mm 1 Select Art A4 Margin 35 Art Letter Margin 35 Art US Letter Margin 35 Art A3 Margin 35 or Art A3 13x19 Margin 35 according to the size you are using For details on the printable area refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Less than 53 Ib 200 gsm 3 Be sure to select Board Paper in Media Type Selecting other media types may cause a malfunction Note Other than Canon genuine specialty paper alternative paper types listed on our website may provide better quality printing For more information about the alternative paper see your local retailer s homepage listed on the Canon Inc website Please note that the customer must bear the cost for connection to the Internet Information regarding the alternative paper is updated on an irregular basis And alterna
94. selected area are removed and the amp Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images a Only JPEG Exif file format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit us Important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Adjusting Images Page 166 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Enhancing Photos gt Adjusting Images Easy PhotoPrint EX Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness contrast etc of images 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click S Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears AD Aido Pets Fr oo Face Siapini os Digital Face Smochin 1 1 1 1 1 CA Uberd Unerhartel IMGO0L2 ajeg Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking p Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to adjust from the list displayed in the
95. setup window 2 Make sure that the printer is on and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens Note lf the printer is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 If necessary complete the following settings Prevent paper abrasion The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high density printing to prevent paper abrasion Check this check box to use this function Align heads manually The Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is normally set to automatic head alignment but you can change it to manual head alignment If the printing results are unsatisfactory even after you execute automatic head alignment see Manual Print Head Alignment and execute manual head alignment Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment Detect Paper Width Detects the width of paper loaded in the printer when printing If the paper width detected by the printer is narrower than the width of the paper specified in Paper Size on the Page Setup tab a message is displayed and printing is stopped Check this check box to detect the paper width a Important If you use a Custom paper size to print specify the size of paper correctly in the Custom Paper Size dialog
96. space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab tet Canen PraQ000 I series Pricting Preferences CA Guck Setup SD Man A Page Sehe af Becs A Mantenance Mady Tipe Fhoto Piper Pro I Ei Paper Source Rear Tray Frnt Chssity Phota Pager Fro E Lemer 2511 215 S279 40m Printing with ICC Profiles Page 310 of 539 pages 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast for Print Quality 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select ICM for Color Correction 6 Select the input profile Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data e For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile Select Standard e For Adobe RGB data Select Adobe RGB 1998 a Important If the application software specifies an input profile the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid If no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer Adobe RGB 1998 is not displayed You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer 7 Select the rendering intent Select the coloring adjustment method in Rendering Intent e Saturation This metho
97. specify the date Setting Holidays Page 213 of 539 pages Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar Note See Help for details on each dialog box Page top Setting Calendar Display Page 214 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Calendar Display Setting Calendar Display You can customize the calendar display fonts lines colors position size etc Click Settings in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click Setup Calendar to display the Calendar Settings dialog box N Important The Position amp Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from the Edit screen Style for Year and Month Anal Sunday Ee Note See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box Page top Opening Saved Files Page 215 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Opening Saved Files Easy PhotoPrint EX Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu i T ROO Pn EX file Edt Yew Help Seki iha Kam wa Aani DO create Enom e manii Sakar Liner To access ged Ramp The Open dialo
98. supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print EE Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Printing Page 149 of 539 pages Page top Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 150 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can correct and enhance images Click p Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct Enhance Images window A Important For Photo Print if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box you cannot correct enhance images Note See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on th
99. than 45 mm 1 77 inches using the Easy PhotoPrint Pro provided on the Setup CD ROM or your page layout software To set margins using the Easy PhotoPrint Pro print following the procedure described in Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro in Printing in Grayscale in the Digital Photo Printing Guide on screen manual If you want to print with no margin convert the image to grayscale using an image editing software or the like then print it without the Grayscale Printing setting in the printer driver To do so in Windows clear the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main sheet then print In Macintosh select Quality amp Media from the pop up menu in the Print dialog box and clear the Grayscale Printing check box then print If printing using the Easy PhotoPrint Pro provided on the Setup CD ROM after converting to grayscale clear the Grayscale Photo check box The gray balance of the image printed after grayscale conversion may seem different compared with the one printed with the Grayscale Printing setting in the printer driver or the Grayscale Photo setting in the Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page top Printing Does Not Start Page 411 of 539 pages Nel a cedi uide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Does Not Start Printing Does Not Start e Check 1 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in then turn the printer on While the Power lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wa
100. the ICC profile stting is correct before printing ollow these steps to check 1 Checking the Image Data 1 Check whether the image is in Adobe RGB sRGB or has no ICC profile For example in Adobe Photoshop select Print from the File menu Image data information appears next to Document under Print in the Color Management screen 2 If SRGB appears for an Adobe RGB image or vice versa check the assigned ICC profile Also check that you have not converted the color space when opening the image You can assign the source ICC profile when selecting Convert to Profile from the Edit menu 2 Setting the ICC Profile for Printing Set the profile you want to use for printing For example in Adobe Photoshop select Print from the File menu and specify a profile from Color Handling under Options in the Color Management screen Printing in Adobe RGB or sRGB Color Space When you want to print an Adobe RGB or sRGB image in the input profile color space check that the input profile is set to Adobe RGB or sRGB select the item that allows the application to manage colors then specify a profile for printing For example in Adobe Photoshop select Photoshop Manages Colors for Color Handling and specify the profile of the paper you want to print on in Printer Profile Points to Check in the Application Settings Page 494 of 539 pages At this time please clear the Black Point Compensation checkbox For printer settings se
101. the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Crop the photo to apply even margins individually Cropping Photos Photo Print EE Note This setting is available for Photo Print only Page top What Is C1 or C4 Page 177 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt What Is C1 or 04 What Is C1 or C4 When an album is printed labels such as C1 and C4 are printed as page numbers The C1 and C4 represent the front cover and back cover respectively C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover C3 Inside the back cover C4 Back cover Page top Photo Print Settings Page 178 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print Settings Printing on a DVD CD gt Printing Photos in Grayscale Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Page top Printing on a DVD CD Page 179 of 539 pages Advanced amide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing
102. the XPS printer driver from Custom Install Using the XPS Printer Driver To use the XPS printer driver for printing open the Print dialog box in application you are using and select your printer name XPS For detailed operating instructions see Help of the XPS printer driver Page top Before Printing on Art Paper Page 440 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Before Printing on Art Paper Before Printing on Art Paper When using art paper dust is liable to be generated It is therefore recommended that paper dust be removed on art paper just before printing e You will need a soft hair brush or similar brush used to clean office automation equipment The wider the brush the more effective it will be D Important Be sure not to use brushes as shown below The printing surface may be damaged e Paper dust removal procedure 1 Check that the brush is not wet and free from dust or dirt 2 Brush the overall printing surface carefully in one direction j ae D Important Be sure to brush all the way across the paper do not start brushing at the middle or stop halfway Be careful not to touch the printing surface as much as possible 3 To complete the removal of paper dust brush the paper in the other direction from top to bottom Before Printing on Art Paper Page 441 of 539 pages Page top gt Printing Area Page 442 of 539 pages Advanced Gu
103. the printer status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 If necessary complete the following settings Auto Power On Specifying Enable from the list will turn the printer on upon receipt of print data Auto Power Off Specify time from the list If this time lapses without any print data being received the printer is turned off automatically 4 Transmit the settings Click Send When the confirmation message appears click OK The Maintenance tab is displayed again The Auto Power On Off function is enabled If you want to disable this function select Disable from the list according to the same procedure Note When the printer is turned off the Status Monitor message varies depending on the Auto Power On setting When Auto Power On is enabled Printer is standing by is displayed When Auto Power On is Managing the Printer Power Page 381 of 539 pages disabled Printer is offline is displayed Page top Reducing the Printer Noise Page 382 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Reducing the Printer Noise Reducing the Printer Noise This function allows you to reduce the operating noise of the printer Select if you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night etc Using this function may lower the print speed The procedure for changing t
104. title bar to change the window size large or small Solution Menu opens with the last used window size next time it is started e When screen size is small About Solution Menu Page 468 of 539 pages am Canon Solution Menu oMa gt ee G D ery e m Starting an Application 1 Point to a button on the window to display the description of each application 2 By clicking each button the introduced application starts Follow the same steps to view the manuals or online product information a Important Internet connection is required to access the online information Internet connection fees apply Exiting Solution Menu Click X Close on the title bar Restriction on Use of Solution Menu This software is subject to the following restriction Keep this point in mind when using it e All icons of the installed applications that support Solution Menu are displayed in the window After the installation you cannot rearrange the icons or delete only the icons Page top Digital Photo Printing Guide Page 469 of 539 pages Digital Photo Printing Guide Printing Techniques to Maximize Your Printer s Performance 2 2i V1 A 00 Printer based Digital Photo Printing This section describes the differences between silver salt film cameras and digital cameras as well as the points to check when printing digital photos This section also explains the basics of color management that are essential for printing
105. window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 4 Clean the Paper Feed Rollers 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Roller Cleaning ee ee ee ee ae ae Fo B En bren Fis Ca PNE Hinai Pert mE riken Pa sini nitions ahi es TH T k i Serer UR eck Seg cared oe ee w RIF arg Le ee ied rh et _ oe __ a 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The Paper Feed Rollers will rotate as they are cleaned eS repe eT a I Cees Maii i aih amg Cheng pope ndah Dect Ges pape E H Her Ep Ch reg Ot a feu pape feed es Ser Te ed i ced a ri Die pmi ami ho ert hed mi Chey omens 3 5 Make sure that the Paper Feed Rollers stop rotating and load paper when the Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 77 of 539 pages message appears Load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray NY Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Load paper in the Rear Tray 6 Click OK The paper is ejected after cleaning Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Paper Feed Rollers 7 When the completion message appears click OK If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers contact the service center 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and remove any paper from the printer 2 Open the
106. with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing on a DVD CD Printing on a DVD CD You can print on a DVD CD using Photo Print Select CD R for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen then select a layout and enter the title If you want to edit the details return to Menu and select DVD CD Label and edit print using CD LabelPrint Follow the steps for other items to complete image selection in the Select Images screen Selecting a Photo 1 Select CD R for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen Set the Printer and Media Type according to the printer and DVD CD to be used Exif Print sal EA Note When CD R is selected only Disc tray will be selectable for Paper Source 2 Click Layout Print The Layout Print screen appears Printing on a DVD CD Ge Mew Pisto Print Easy PhotePrint EX file Edit View Help Selaci the Land aout lo pad Photo Print Gherk the Pre sre clkck the Print buthon Exif Print e Select Paper 3 Select a layout you want to use 4 Enter the title s and specify the details of the layout in Advanced Note Items that can be set may vary depending on the selected layout 5 Click Print set a DVD CD and print according to the message Printing starts from the top of the image displayed in Preview N Important Do not install a CD R tray until the message prompting you
107. 0 00 x 12 00 inches 25 x 30 cm 14 x 17 14 00 x 17 00 inches 36 x 43 cm L 3 50 x 5 00 inches 89 0 x 127 0 mm 2L 5 00 x 7 01 inches 127 0 x 178 0 mm Hagaki 3 94 x 5 83 inches 100 0 x 148 0 mm Hagaki 2 7 87 x 5 83 inches 200 0 x 148 0 mm Comm Env 10 4 12 x 9 50 inches 104 6 x 241 3 mm DL Env 4 33 x 8 66 inches 110 0 x 220 0 mm Choukei 3 4 72 x 9 25 inches 120 0 x 235 0 mm Choukei 4 3 54 x 8 07 inches 90 0 x 205 0 mm Youkei 4 4 13 x 9 25 inches 105 0 x 235 0 mm Youkei 6 3 86 x 7 48 inches 98 0 x 190 0 mm Wide 4 00 x 7 10 inches 101 6 x 180 6 mm Art Letter Margin 35 8 50 x 11 00 inches 215 9 x 279 4 mm Media Types You Can Use Page 47 of 539 pages Art A4 Margin 35 8 27 x 11 69 inches 210 0 x 297 0 mm Art A3 Margin 35 11 69 x 16 54 inches 297 0 x 420 0 mm Art A3 Margin 35 13 00 x 19 00 inches 329 0 x 483 0 mm Non standard sizes You can also specify a custom size within the following range Minimum size 3 50 x 5 00 inches 89 0 x 127 0 mm Rear Tray 3 94 x 5 83 inches 100 0 x 148 0 mm Front Tray Maximum size 12 95 x 26 61 inches 329 0 x 676 0 mm Rear Tray 14 00 x 23 00 inches 355 6 x 584 2 mm Front Tray Paper Weight Thickness Rear Tray From 17 lb 64 gsm to 28 Ib 105 gsm plain paper except for Canon genuine paper Do not use heavier or lighter paper except for Canon genu
108. 13 in 3 4 mm 0 13 in 3 4 mm Recommended printing area LI Printable area Page top Letter Legal Page 444 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Letter Legal Letter Legal Size Printable Area width x height Letter 8 00 x 10 69 inches 203 2 x 271 4 mm Legal 8 00 x 13 69 inches 203 2 x 347 6 mm pot 0 12 in 3 0 mm 1 38 in 35 0 mm fn E 0 2in 5 0 mm yo J i i 0 24 in 6 4mm 0 24 in 6 3 mm 12 in 30 5 mm Recommended printing area L Printable area Page top Sizes for Art Paper Page 445 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Sizes for Art Paper Sizes for Art Paper When using the Art Paper or non Canon genuine specialty paper printing is not done in a 1 38 inches 35 mm margin along the top and bottom edges A limit is set to prevent printing along a 1 38 inches 35 mm margin on the top and bottom edges when a paper size for Art Paper is selected in the printer driver Art A4 Margin 35 Art A3 Margin 35 Art A3 Margin 35 Size Printable Area width x height Art A4 Margin 35 8 0 x 8 9 inches 203 2 x 227 0 mm Art A3 Margin 35 1 1 4 x 13 8 inches 290 2 x 350 0 mm Art A3 Margin 35 12 7 x 16 3 inches 322 2 x 413 0 mm 1 38 in 35 0 mm 4 38 in 35 0 mm i cs Fi 0 13 in 3 4 mm 0 13 in 3 4mm Ea Recommended
109. 37 of 539 pages Use a pen to press the leading edge in the inserting direction flat and sharpen the crease The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope D Important The envelopes may jam in the printer if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned Make sure that no curl or puff exceeds 0 1 inches 3 mm 2 Load envelopes 1 Open the Paper Support 2 Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 3 Pull out the Front Tray Extension 4 Make sure that the Front Feed button is not lit If the Front Feed button is lit or flashing set the Front Tray to its normal printing position See Returning the Front Tray to Its Normal Printing Position 1 6 Load the envelopes in the Rear Tray WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING YOU Align the envelopes with the right edge of the Rear Tray The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once 7 Slide the Paper Guide to align it with the left side of the envelopes Do not slide the Paper Guide too hard The envelopes may not be fed properly Loading Paper in the Rear Tray 7 A Rear side B Address side 8 Close the Feed Slot Cover 3 Specify the settings in the printer driver 1 Select Business Document in Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup sheet 2 Select Envelope in Media Type 3 Select DL Env or Comm Env 10 in Print
110. 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Explanation Window Operating the Explanation Window Ley Ram n hi d Back po fh Gj Cements yy My Manual 6 Search arin Advanced Gmde Advanced Guide Kaw ts Use Tha Manual Aner BTH ne tere nanii How to Use This Manual Opening the Cantents Pane pF rime Leng Keywords to Find a Topic Regislenng Topka to My Manual Symbols Used in This Oecument Trademares 1 Click the green characters to jump to the corresponding page 2 The cursor jumps to the top of this page Page top Printing This Manual Page 96 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Printing This Manual Printing This Manual Lg Cance Sc Skew F cenes On cereen Manual q Gack p p Comens yy My Manual J Searc Print e T anm en Select Tarpet Start Prince Ford Frew Do aai r F 5 z How ty Use This Wawel Printing This Manual Documents to Ba Painted T Canon Sat Basle Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Desoibes the summary of this Descibes fie detailed functon ndut of this product Click F to display the Print pane to the left of the on screen manual D Important a When printing on plain paper open the printer driver setup window click the Quick Setup tab
111. C Profiles Cannot be Set Page 515 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Other Applications gt Case 3 g from Applications in which ICC Profiles Cannot be Set ase 3 Printing from Applications in which ICC Profiles Cannot be et int an image using the color space of the input ICC profile Adobe RGB or sRGB even when u cannot or do not identify set input ICC profiles within an application other than Easy 1otoPrint Pro Fat g Advice llow these steps to print Adobe RGB images using the Adobe RGB color space from yplications that do not support Adobe RGB 1 Opening an Image in an Application Open the image you want to print in an application other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro 2 Opening the Print Settings Screen of the Printer Driver 1 Select the Print command from the application menu Example Click File gt Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Preferences or Properties The Print Settings screen of the printer driver appears Microsoft APS Document Writer Location Page Range 2 All Selection Curent Page Pages Opening the Manual Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Select the Main tab 2 Set the Media Type and Print Quality Case 3 Printing from Applications in which ICC Profiles Cannot be Set 3 Click Manual for Color Intensity rear Tey z Figh Photo Paper Fius Glossy
112. Canon Pro9000 Mark II series On screen Manual Page 1 of 539 pages Canon How to Use This Manual gt Printing This Manual Manual MC 3582 V 1 00 a a ki x 4 P n 3 a F r E igs a pn 4 j Basic Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Describes the summary of this Describes the detailed function product of this product Pro9000 Mark II series Basic Guide Canon How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual Printing on DVD CDs MP 3098 V1 00 Contents s Safety Precautions Overview of the Printer Main Components Printing Photos Documents Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Macintosh gt Other Usages Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Solution Menu and My Printer Advanced Guide amp amp gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Routine Maintenance Replacing an Ink Tank When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Opening the Maintenance Screens gt Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 2 of 539 pages Safety Precautions Page 3 of 539 pages BasicGuide Contents gt Safety Precautions A Safety Precautions Please read the safety warnings and cautions provided in this manual to ensure that you use the printer safely Do not attempt to use the printer in any way not described in t
113. Changing the confirmation screen setting 1 Select items the Start menu as shown below e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Programs and Features gt Uninstall a program e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 429 of 539 pages Note In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting up software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue 2 Select Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 3 Select Change If you select Yes after you have followed the on screen instructions the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey If you select No the information will be sent automatically Note If you select Uninstall or Remove the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is uninstalled Follow the on screen instructions IEE the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears If the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is installed the printer usage information is scheduled to be sent three months and then six months after the installation Afte
114. Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Layout You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Changing Layout Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos m Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers m How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 144 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX lt gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selg tha mar yas Aane Te create from the many Dolch Liner fo access gaed Kemi Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 145 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selectin
115. Flexibly on a Digital Camera before inting Advanced Functions for Direct Printing from Your Camera Adjusting Colors before Printing Page top amp Advanced Functions for Direct Printing from Your Camera Page 525 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Adjusting Colors Flexibly on a Digital Camera before Printing gt Advanced ions for Direct Printing from Your Camera Advanced Functions for Direct Printing from Your Camera lis section explains the advanced functions that can be customized on PictBridge compatible anon digital cameras f MEMO e The following functions can only be customized when a Canon digital camera compatible with the advanced functions is connected to this printer s Color Mode Setting Image Optimize Print Effect you can select one of five color modes Natural Natural M Black hite Cool tone and Warm tone yr the settings procedure refer to the manual of your Canon PictBridge compatible device atural Images are printed in color tones similar to those of the images captured with a digital camera When a setting such as Picture Style is embedded the effect is reflected in the print results atural M Change colors when printing images captured with a digital camera by adjusting brightness contrast etc For items that can be adjusted refer to the following section Adjusting Colors before Printing lac
116. Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it a Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility dialog box See Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 4 Clean the Paper Feed Rollers 1 Make sure that Cleaning is selected in the pop up menu 2 Click Roller Cleaning were Carmia d Piieaer imikrp Puede pases oa Chamin lt Ciriimaiss usatied eTerigua arri lirei m Ha prier sea Wap Clearing st Lite eos ibai re be cred By regula Deere Batam Are Clarice Pret pap imit Sole piriitg Aster Linar i Espmuiei pirt tebar heating Hu eee pee i lees ij 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The Paper Feed Rollers will rotate as they are cleaned Taris Geen parer Peed ced eee Poe eps pees foo che cer Wy Ceri a ei Sear Bua eo Tha ed a aie hate oe Pa a Oey ee a Peed ler cere amt Gas 3 Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 8 of 539 pages 5 Make sure that the Paper Feed Rollers stop rotating and load paper when the message appears Load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray NY Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Load paper in the Rear Tray 6 Click OK The paper is ejected after cleaning Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the
117. Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation Load paper in the Rear Tray or Front Tray in the correct orientation Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 84 of 539 pages B C A Desired print result B Rear Tray C Front Tray Load paper in the Rear Tray with the print side Load paper in the Front Tray with the print side facing you facing up Is the paper loaded in the proper paper source Load paper either in the Rear Tray or in the Front Tray depending on the size or type of paper E D Rear Tray E Front Tray You can load various sizes of paper in the You can load large size paper such as 14 x 17 Rear Tray 36 x 43 cm paper or thick paper in the Front Two or more sheets of the same size and Tray type of paper can be loaded at a time Only one sheet of paper can be loaded at a time Is the paper curled The curled paper causes paper jam Flatten the curled paper then reload it Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Tip After loading paper be sure to specify the paper settings After loading paper be sure to select the loaded paper in Media Type of the printer driver If the type of paper is not selected you may not be able to get the satisfactory print result See Printing Photos Documents and Media Types You Can Use There are various types of paper paper with special coating on the surface for printing photos with optimal quality and paper su
118. M Latter SFI T 215 Se2F3 eam 4 Click Set to the right of Manual The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box appears n Setting the Color Correction and Input Profile 1 Select the Matching tab 2 Select ICM for Color Correction 3 Set the Input Profile For Adobe RGB images select Adobe RGB 1998 For SRGB images select Standard EJ sropsl arr A erect et Manual Color Adjustment memo e lf an input profile is specified in the application it takes priority over the input profile specified in the printer driver Page 516 of 539 pages Case 3 Printing from Applications in which ICC Profiles Cannot be Set Page 517 of 539 pages 4 Click OK J Printing Click Print of MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top Case 4 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Page 518 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Other Applications gt Case 4 Edit ch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images ase 4 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images lit retouch an sRGB image and print the resulting image Advice ply Linear Tone to output the subtle color differences between the dark and bright parts without anging the brightness of the darkest blackest and brightest whites
119. Page top Adjusting the Color Balance Page 239 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Adjust the Colors of Photo gt Adjusting the Color Balance Easy PhotoPrint Pro Adjusting the Color Balance You can adjust the color balance of an image 1 Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the bottom right area of the screen Note See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 Click Color Adjustment in the Printer Settings window a Ie a a a Humber of imeqer 4 Pager Size dd Media Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy I Paget The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Adjust the intensity for Cyan Magenta and Yellow in Color Balance Adjusting the Color Balance Page 240 of 539 pages Brightness All a Cerla N Important Ifthe print result after adjusting the color balance is different from the preview image print a color pattern and adjust the colors based on the pattern m Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns The color balance adjustment applies to all images to print EE Note Move the slider to the right to increase and left to reduce intensity 4 Click OK Page top Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Page 241 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundl
120. Po Check2 What is RAW data RAW data allows you to process images using Adobe RGB and save them with ICC profile tags Look at the advantages of capturing RAW images Printing Rewarding Photos from RAW Data may Check3 How can I convert sRGB to Adobe RGB You can edit sRGB images using the Adobe RGB color space However sRGB images will be printed with increased saturation if opened in the Adobe RGB color space directly They must go through the correct color space conversion process Points to Check in the Application Settings It is recommended that you print SRGB images using the color correction function of the driver ou would not be aware of color spaces when using a compact digital camera Generally compact digital cameras are set to use the sRGB color space SRGB is a color space designed to display uniform colors on digital cameras and monitors On a monitor you can check the images in colors as close to the original colors as possible Use the color correction function of the driver when printing sRGB images so that you can check edited retouched images on a monitor and print the resulting images Essential Basics of Color Management Page 478 of 539 pages In addition you can print captured images in popular color tones using Canon Digital Photo Color Fo Check1 How can utilize the characteristics of compressed data Exif is the standard file format for digital camera images You can print E
121. Point Compensation checkbox memo e For application settings see the following section Checking the Application Settings 2 Opening the Print Settings Screen of the Printer Driver 1 Select the Print command from the application menu Example Click File gt Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Preferences or Properties The Print Settings screen of the printer driver appears Case 2 Printing by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application Page 513 of 539 pages lm Prnt Microsoft XPS Document Writer Status Ready Comment Page Range All M Selection Curent Page Pages e cea Ft a Opening the Manual Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Select the Main tab 2 Set the Media Type and Print Quality 3 Click Manual for Color Intensity Photo Paper Fius Gloesy I Letter 211 215 Seo Sen 4 Click Set to the right of Manual The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box appears i Setting the Color Correction 1 Select the Matching tab 2 Select None for Color Correction Case 2 Printing by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application Page 514 of 539 pages 3 Click OK j Printing Click Print o MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top Case 3 Printing from Applications in which IC
122. Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes EE Note For Photo Print you can also correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Correct Enhance Images Window Page 1 0 of 539 pages Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can adjust the effect level using the slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can adjust the effect level using the slider Apply to all images Automatically corrects all the images displayed in the list OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Manual Tab Select to correct manually Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast or to sharpen the entire image Use Correct Enhance to correct enhance specific areas Adjust Erhat Ceri acct E n j Thig _ i SPee Aeneid F Taken prhini gilga Brightness Adjusts the overall image brig
123. Select a borderless layout and click Set that appears to the right of Layout to display the Set Amount of Extension of Borderless Printing dialog box in which you can specify the amount of extension See Help for details Page top Printing an Index Page 251 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings gt Printing an Index Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page It is convenient for managing your photos To print an index select Index for Layout in the Printer Settings window foe x ah Pre fan ew denen ial a at afm an a an n t al ata a atm afim a al ein ah af aa a 0 ean Mate ao NY Important You can print up to 80 images on one page EE Note Index prints can only be printed on Letter 8 5 x11 A4 and A3 paper Select Index and click Set that appears to the right of Layout to change the number of columns and rows or add a header footer Page top Printing Contact Sheets Page 252 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings gt Printing Contact Sheets Printing Contact Sheets You can print an index of photos with a design that looks li
124. Selected 3 Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider Note For Photo Print red eyes are automatically corrected when Enable Auto Photo Fix is selected in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox is selected To disable the automatic correction deselect the checkbox Face Brightener Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened You can adjust the effect level using the slider Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the Correct Enhance Images Window Page 172 of 539 pages slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the Slider Blemish Remover Removes moles You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area Undo Cancels the latest correction ennhancement Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements Save All Corrected Images Saves all the image
125. Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Page Layout Printing Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set page layout printing Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the printer driver Canen Pic 0 pie Pring Prefererce El Page Sp Letter 2 57117 4 Onenintion Aj Pose LA CO Lawes et Renate 120 degrees FB prer Peper Sie ater kris Page Layout Pega Layou Phot Pager Fre 1 LJ TE 215 Sel ae Ftto Page 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list Now you have finished setting the layout of the document from left to right 4 Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page sequence If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box and click OK Page Layout Printing Page 272 of 539 pages Pages To increase the number of pages to be included on a single sheet of paper select a desired number of pages from the list Page Order To change the page arrangement order select an icon from the list to
126. Source Specified in the Printer Driver Paper Jams Message Appears on the Computer Screen For Windows Users Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device m FAQs f You Cannot Resolve the Problem Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page top gt lf an Error Occurs Page 386 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If an Error Occurs If an Error Occurs When an error occurs in printing such as the printer is out of paper or paper is jammed a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically Take the appropriate action described in the message The message may vary depending on the version of your operating system indows Printing ieee Printarig Error Number 1000 The following paper has nun out Media Type Photo Paper Pro I Pager Size AS L Load pager inte the rear tray 2 Press the printer s RESUME Bargi Status Mamit Uer When Completed Printing eo Bae E mt OR 12 31 14 36 e In Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 Error Number 1000 The following paper has run owt Media Type Photo Paper Pro II Paper Size Aa 1 Load paper inte the rear tray 2 Press the printer s Stop Aljobs Sep 0b Page top The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Page 387 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt The Printer Cannot Be Powered On The Printer Cannot Be Powered On e Check 1 Press the Power button
127. Streaks Page 401 of 539 pages 4 Select Adobe RGB 1998 for Input Profile If Adobe RGB 1998 is not displayed select Custom Install on the Setup CD ROM then install the Adobe RGB 1998 Page top Lines Are Misaligned Page 402 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Lines Are Misaligned Lines Are Misaligned e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform Print Head Alignment If you did not align the Print Head after installation straight lines may be printed misaligned Be sure to align the Print Head after you install it m Routine Maintenance Note a Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Manual Print Head Alignment e Check 3 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 4 Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used thin lines may not be printed Try thickening the lines in the document Page top Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Page 403 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not S
128. T i same os Page Diit Pope Lyi homai Hifa csaj Page Layout Phote Paper Pro E Lese pS 11 215 2279 3 Specify the print sequence Check the Print from Last Page check box if you want to print from the last page in order If you do this you do not need to sort pages into their correct order after printing 4 Set up collated printing when you specify multiple copies in the Copies box Check the Collate check box if you are specifying multiple copy together Uncheck this check box to print all pages with the same page number together 5 Complete the setup Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 262 of 539 pages Click OK The specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order NY Important If the application software that you used to create the document has the same function give priority to the printer driver settings However if the print results are not acceptable specify the function settings on the application software If you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable if Booklet is selected for Page Layout Print f
129. Tab Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab allows you to perform printer maintenance or change the settings of the printer Elmings unwanted smudges ard lines in i Prewernts papar smudges during printing Deep Oeming ini li Ese pola another regular chery Print Head Siyeri Ebagi pid head algomerd ts cones nc pak ee he raakonmernt of clog ancl lees Hoge Check Auto Power e E Cuan Aires pou to eet the mio power parga head nait oe cegoed com LEE Gue Moda Aires anu bo duce the opspting mise Features Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers m Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Printer Managing the Printer Power Related Features Reducing the Printer Noise Quiet Mode Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page top Canon IJ Status Monitor Page 333 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing on the Windows screen You will know the status of the printer with graphics icons and messages Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Status Monitor launches automatically when data is sent to the printer When launched the Canon lJ Status Monito
130. The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type D Important a When Fine Art is selected for Paper Size a 1 38 inch 35 mm margin is automatically left at the top and bottom of the paper It is recommended that you check the print range with the image shown in Preview before printing E Note You can print directly on the DVD CD surface by selecting CD R for Paper Size Printing on a DVD CD You can print photos in grayscale gt Printing Photos in Grayscale m You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise m Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise See Help for details on the Select Paper screen O Selecting the Paper Page 113 of 539 pages Page top Printing Page 114 of 539 pages 1 Click Layout Print The Layout Print screen appears file Edt View Help Delati te Land ao are lo pad Cheech thee Preiss red cick thes Prank bastion ate Printing tarts Exif Print M 4 E ES i Bordetess Bonded pa g Larout Print e sege deri z Bodsadj A D Important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select a layout you want to use Click a borderles
131. Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes gt Add a printer e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers gt Add a printer When Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen appears click Next Settings on Client PC Page 463 of 539 pages 3 Add a printer Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer Windows XP or Network printer Windows 2000 then click Next On the Specify a Printer window Windows XP or Locate Your Printer window Windows 2000 click Next and then search for the print server system Click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server 4 Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers and Faxes window Windows XP or Printers window Windows 2000 This completes the setup on the client systems You can now share the printer in the network O Page top Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page 464 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Restrictions on Printer Sharing Restrictions on Printer Sharing These are restricti
132. You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click GP Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears T F Rey Con esction oe Face 5 hapira os Digital Face Seasathing EE Cake U erhimeendipa Selected 3 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking qP Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Auto Enhancement 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing 9 Click OK Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 162 of 539 pages Skin is enhanced beautifully and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing Click Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation If you want to apply the enhanc
133. _sjop POSH Sty ell Trede Pagasi rrage s 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area EA Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click E Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Delete All Imported Images Page top Editing Page 147 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede bout print elaments as needed Parm paag add mapas or change yout Ede too Insde Pages fifa a alae General Tools alex x 2 Edit the layout if necessary Changing Layout m Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos D Important The edit infor
134. ackground on the Page Setup tab The Stamp Background dialog box opens 3 Select the background Check the Background check box and select a desired background from the list The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the background details If necessary complete the following settings and then click OK Background first page only To print the background only on the first page check this check box Select Background button To use another bitmap file or change the layout or density of a background click this refer to Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified background NS Important When Borderless is selected the Stamp Background button appears grayed out and is unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of Booklet Printing Related Topics Saving a Stamp Setting Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background Stamp Background Printing Page 282 of 539 pages Page top Saving a Stamp Setting Page 283 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Saving a Stamp Setting Saving a Stamp Setting Th
135. agement i Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro 1 Open the image you want to print in an Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible application Edit retouch the image as needed 2 Start Easy PhotoPrint Pro memo e To start Easy PhotoPrint Pro see the following section Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro Opening the Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Select the image for which you want to adjust the color from the Page List area 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adjustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears J Setting the Color Mode 1 Click the Color Management tab 2 Select Ambient Light Correction for Color Mode 3 From Ambient Light select the lighting condition of the place where the image is viewed displayed or exhibited Case 4 Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Page 506 of 539 pages Comection Coker Hansgemem Arben Lit Conecte o o dF 4 Click OK of MEMO e The selectable ambient lighting options include fluorescent lamps designed for color evaluation and other commercially available ones For how to check the type of fluorescent lamp and details on the settings refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide l Printing 1 Set the Paper Size Media Type and Layout 2 Click Print MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual A
136. ails on how to print in grayscale from the computer refer to Printing Photos in Grayscale Trimming Default Off No trimming On follow the camera s setting Off Page top Maintenance Page 358 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance Maintenance s Cleaning Your Printer Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page top Cleaning Your Printer Page 359 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer Cleaning Your Printer Cleaning s Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer Page top Cleaning Page 360 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning Cleaning This section describes the cleaning procedure that is needed to maintain your printer D Important Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials for cleaning so as not to scratch the surface Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the printer and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results Be sure to use a soft cloth Never use volatile liquids such as thinners benzene acetone or any other chemical cleaner to clean the printer as this may cause a malfunction or damage the printer s surface m Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer Page top Cl
137. ame otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited with Easy PhotoPrint EX Page top Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Page 175 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Easy PhotoPrint EX Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from As shown below printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout Print screen Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates See your printer manual for details on how to load paper to print on the front back etc Page top How Do Print with Even Margins Page 1 6 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Do Print with Even Margins Easy PhotoPrint EX How Do I Print with Even Margins When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other depending on the image and printer To always print with even margins select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click cet Settings in
138. anced uide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device About PictBridge Print Settings Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 354 of 539 pages Advancediamde Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device You can connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera camcorder or mobile phone using a USB cable recommended by the device s manufacturer and print recorded images directly without using a computer Note When printing photos with the PictBridge compliant device connected to the printer we recommend the use of the AC adapter supplied with the device If you are using the device battery be sure to charge it fully a Depending on the model or brand of your device you may have to select a print mode compliant with PictBridge before connecting the device You may also have to turn on the device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the printer Perform necessary operations on the PictBridge compliant device before connecting it to this printer according to i
139. ancing Photos Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos m Adding Text to Photos m Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers m How Can Move or Copy the Saved File m What Is C1 or C4 Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 117 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX K Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selg tha mar yas Aane Te create from the many Dolch Liner fo access gaed Kemi Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 118 of 539 pages advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Album from Menu The Page Setup screen appears ET File Edit Yw Help Sged ahan STS Dag Pe GEC F Ganaryl gatter chen sabri a Tere Chex tha butters at the b
140. and select Plain Paper for Media Type T To open the printer driver setup window click then click Properties Note Click to close or display the Print pane click Print Settings to open the Print dialog box and Click and then click Option Settings to display the Option Settings dialog box You can then set up the printing operation Print document title and page number When this check box is checked the manual name and the page number are printed in the header top of the document Print background color and images When this check box is checked the background color and the image are printed Some images are printed regardless of whether this check box is checked or not Check number of pages to be printed before printing When this check box is checked the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed before printing starts This dialog box allows you to check how many pages will be printed Click and then click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box When the dialog box is displayed select the printer to be used for printing After selecting the printer to be used click Properties to specify the print settings The following four methods of printing are available e Current Document e Selected Documents e My Manual e All Documents Printing This Manual Page 97 of 539 pages Current Document You can print the currently displayed topic 1 From Select Target sele
141. and PictBridge compliant device Paper type e Default Photo Paper Pro II PR 201 e Photo Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 Photo Stickers 1 1 When printing on sticker paper select 10 x 15 cm 4 x 6 in Paper size Do not set Layout to Borderless e Semi gloss 2 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 If your device does not have this setting select Photo or Default in Paper type e Fast Photo Photo Paper Pro II PR 201 e Fine Art 2 Fine Art Paper Photo Rag FA PR1 When Fine Art is selected for Paper type borderless printing will be disabled even when Layout is set to Borderless e Plain A3 A4 Letter When Paper type is set to Plain borderless printing will be disabled even when Layout is set to Borderless 2 Available only with a Canon brand PictBridge compliant device May not be available with some Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices Layout Default Borderless Index Bordered Borderless N up 2 4 9 16 1 20 up 2 35 up 3 1 Layout compatible with A4 or Letter sized paper and Canon brand sticker above A4 Letter 4 up Photo Stickers 2 up 4 up 9 up 16 up 2 With a Canon brand PictBridge compliant device selecting items with I mark allows you to print shooting info Exif Data in list format 20 up or on the margins of the specified data 1 up May not be available with some Canon brand PictBridge compl
142. and halftone expression method Move the Quality slider to select the quality level Select Halftoning and click OK Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 298 of 539 pages Note Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to express the halftones Diffusion places the dots randomly to express the halftones When you select Auto the data is printed with the optimal halftoning method for the selected print quality 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified quality level and halftoning method NY Important Certain print quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type Note When the part of the object is not printed selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 299 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Printing a Color Document in Mono
143. and turn off the printer Then clear the jammed paper or Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 423 of 539 pages protective material that is preventing the Print Head Holder from moving and turn on the printer again a Important Be careful not to touch the components inside the printer The printer may not print out properly if you touch it If the problem is not resolved contact the service center e Four digit alphanumeric and Printer error has occurred Is displayed Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Error Regarding the Rear Tray or Front Tray Is Displayed e Check 1 Is the printer ready to feed paper from the Front Tray Load the paper correctly in the Front Tray and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to load the paper correctly in the Front Tray e Check 2 Is the paper size that cannot feed from the Rear Tray selected in the printer driver Select the paper source correctly and try printing again Click Cancel Printing in the dialog box that is displayed Then select Front Tray from Paper Source on the Main sheet in the printer driver Load the paper in the Front Tray and try printing again Click Delete Job in the dialog box that is displayed Select Quality amp Media from the pop up
144. are gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Blemish Remover Function Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click S Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears Fase Share Diaa Face Smoothing Co Uterd UG re giles Sektid 3 EE Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EE Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Blemish Remover Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 165 of 539 pages oo Ereann OO EF Rad ey i Redtye Corectoe aM Face Dreghteres of Faces Shape OS Dagta Face Smoothing 20 Treci lhe Mea pou rent bo ciez Bkoek Raiya 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Moles in and around the
145. are application For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide To feed paper from the Front Tray select Front Tray in Paper Source 3 Click OK ee ee Ee OF ikir aig T me hi Pig ei i e Y Note For details on the printer driver functions click Help or Instructions to view the online help or the on screen manual Advanced Guide The Instructions button appears on the Quick Setup Main and Maintenance sheets if the on screen manual is installed on your computer You can name the changed settings and add to Commonly Used Settings For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide To display the current settings next time when you open the printer driver setup window select the Always Print with Current Settings check box Some software applications may not have this function To display the preview to confirm the print result select the Preview before printing check box Some software applications may not have a preview function You can specify detailed print settings on the Main sheet or Page Setup sheet For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Printing Documents Windows 7 Start printing Click Print or OK to start printing am De EF Dika Fieve hp aoe Pepe 2 Lan ee ee EF Fa me a S er A ee mikt Pateescen wal ici Prd oe Sa 4 Un eH KM rare Eo kepe pee EE EE En E g L L cage ge For meal 5 2 To cancel a print j
146. ation software running 8 Follow the procedure described in your setup manual to reinstall the printer driver e In other cases Follow the procedure described in your setup manual for proper installation If the driver was not installed correctly uninstall the printer driver restart your computer then reinstall the driver Uninstalling the Printer Driver If you reinstall the printer driver select Custom Install on the Setup CD ROM Note If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error the system may be in an unstable condition and you may not be able to install the driver Restart your computer before reinstalling Page top Cannot Install the Application Program Page 395 of 539 pages AdvancediGmde Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Install the Application Program Cannot Install the Application Program Easy PhotoPrint Pro Does Not Start up or Easy PhotoPrint Pro Menu Does Not Appear If the Easy PhotoPrint Pro menu does not appear on Adobe Photoshop although you have installed Easy PhotoPrint Pro make sure that Adobe Photoshop is not running and install Adobe Photoshop Plug In as described below 1 Click Start and select All Programs or Programs Canon Utilities Easy PhotoPrint Pro and then Photoshop Plug in Installer 2 Follow the on screen instructions to install Adobe Photoshop Plug In acintosh 1 Select Applications from the Go menu and double
147. atisfactory gt Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Curls e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion Confirm the intensity using the printer driver Adjusting Intensity e Check 3 Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs It is recommended that you use photo paper to print photos or pictures in deep color that have high color saturation Loading Paper Page top Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 404 of 539 pages dvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged The Edges of Paper Printed Surface Are Smudged Is Smudged gt Printed Surface Is Scratched e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Is the appropriate type of paper used Check the followings e Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable for your printing purpose Loading Paper e When performing Borderless Printing
148. attern Print window 6 Click Print The pattern is printed EE Note The source image is printed in the center Brightness increases from bottom to top Contrast increases from left to right Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns Page 248 of 539 pages 7 Click OK 8 Select the image with the desired brightness contrast from the printed pattern and enter the values indicated below the image into Brightness and Contrast 9 Click OK Page top Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings Page 249 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings Printing Borderless Photos m Printing an Index Printing Contact Sheets Printing Advanced Information Trimming Photos Printing with Adjusted Print Size Saving Print Settings Page top Printing Borderless Photos Page 250 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings gt Printing Borderless Photos Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Borderless Photos You can print borderless photos by selecting a borderless layout from Layout in the Printer Settings window J oP b aT Ei gt Hp saea c Boa Number of imager d Paper Size dol Media Type Photo Paper Plus Cicas I Note
149. attern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center e Check 3 Perform Print Head Alignment m Routine Maintenance EE Note Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 410 of 539 pages Alignment manually referring to Manual Print Head Alignment e Check 4 When printing in grayscale follow the procedure below When printing in grayscale depending on an image the printing troubles may occur on the top and or bottom edges of the paper such as uneven coloration or white streaks In this case we recommend printing with the top and bottom margins in the print direction of the paper set to more
150. autiful Photos Page 220 of 539 pages Printing an sRGB image using Canon Digital Photo Color gt Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Note Colors in prints look different depending on the lighting conditions To prevent such differences you can correct images and print in color tones suitable for their corresponding light sources Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Color Management Terms e What is an ICC Profile ICC profile is a data file that describes the color reproduction characteristics of individual devices to match the colors between input devices Scanners and digital cameras and output devices displays and printers e What is sRGB SRGB is an international standard color space developed for the purpose of unifying the colors of digital cameras and displays e What is Adobe RGB Adobe RGB is a color space which defines the range of colors that is larger than sRGB In printing Adobe RGB can represent the range of colors between green and cyan that cannot be represented by sRGB e What is Canon Digital Photo Color Canon Digital Photo Color is Canon s unique image processing technology This technology allows you to print images in popular beautiful color tones by producing high contrast with sharp three dimensional feel while reproducing the genuine colors of the original image Page top Printing with ICC Profiles Adobe RGB sRGB Page 221 of 539 pages d
151. ave one side of a sheet blank check Insert blank page check box and select the page to be left blank Margin Enter the margin width The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin for one page Page Border To print a page border around each document page check the Page Border check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper When the printing of one side is complete set the paper correctly by following the message and click OK When the printing of the other side is complete fold the paper at the center of the margin and make a booklet D Important Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type When Booklet is selected Duplex Printing Staple Side Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of Booklet Printing Page top gt Duplex Printing Page 278 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Duplex Printing Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the
152. ayed Error Number 2500 Is Displayed Other Error Messages The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device FAQs If You Cannot Resolve the Problem Instructions for Use Printer Driver Using Easy PhotoPrint EX About Solution Menu How to Use This Manual Page 93 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Explanation Window Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Topic m Registering Topics to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document Trademarks Page top Operating the Contents Pane Page 94 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Contents Pane w e l oy T Eriphia Se Se ESS ra ee Py een Pr Li 7 Ure pE Meam 4 beck p OD UU Contents se My Manual P Search op Print Conon ett ee Oster Ons BE MS Hew to Lior This Harea Advanced Guide Advanced Gude Printing fom 6 Cempeter Printing wih Other Appbcates Software Overview af ihe Prier Drie Cason U Printer Drina Canon lJ Printer Driver The Ganon U painter diver is software iS installed on your computer for pan
153. b of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click Be Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page top Printing an Index Page 189 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing an Index Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page It is convenient for managing your photos To print an index select Index from the layouts in the Layout Print screen fz Pieva T ee rok es PhatePrint p Ble bait View Hep Sebec thee Land ao are be ped Check the Preaes sed clk the Print button Previrep charts ARH amp lm amp ac Bint ed bul m ai Bondeed 2 z Bordeteqs fanaid jell D Important Index print will be disabled if you select any of the following paper sizes Credit Card Fine Art A4 Fine Art A3 Fine Art A3 Fine Art Letter CD R You can print up to 80 images on one page EA Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example Index x20 You can change the printing orde
154. be Photoshop select Photoshop Manages Colors and specify the profile of the paper you want to print on in Printer Profile At this time please clear the Black Point Compensation checkbox memo e For application settings see the following section Checking the Application Settings 2 Opening the Print Settings Screen of the Printer Driver 1 Select the Print command from the application menu Example Click File gt Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Preferences or Properties The Print Settings screen of the printer driver appears Case 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Page 510 of 539 pages lm Prnt Microsoft XPS Document Writer Status Ready Comment Page Range All M Selection Curent Page Pages e cea Ft a Opening the Manual Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Select the Main tab 2 Set the Media Type and Print Quality 3 Click Manual for Color Intensity Photo Paper Fius Gloesy I Letter 211 215 Seo Sen 4 Click Set to the right of Manual The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box appears i Setting the Color Correction 1 Select the Matching tab 2 Select None for Color Correction Case 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Page 511 of 539 pages 3 Click OK J Printing Click Print o MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings ref
155. bleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Check the status of ink tanks Replace the ink tank if the ink No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 400 of 539 pages has run out Routine Maintenance e Check 3 Is the orange tape or protective film remaining Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the air hole is exposed as illustrated in A If the orange tape is left as in B pull the orange tape and remove it e Check 4 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head
156. box If an error message appears when you use the specified paper size uncheck the Detect Paper Width check box Ink Drying Wait Time You can set the length of the printer rest time until printing of the next page begins Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time lf the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries increase the ink drying wait time Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing 4 Transmit the settings Click Send and click OK when the confirmation message appears After that the printer operates with the modified settings Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page 384 of 539 pages Page top Troubleshooting Page 385 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting m f an Error Occurs The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Cannot Install the Printer Driver Cannot Install the Application Program Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Print Results Not Satisfactory Printing Does Not Start Printing Stops Before It Is Completed m Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper
157. button on the printer BEE Eror Number 1856 Is Displayed e Check Close the Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer A page of print data being sent at the time of the error will be erased so print that page again EERTE Error Number 2001 Is Displayed e See Nine flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action TD Error Number 2002 Is Displayed e See Nineteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action MESTE Error Number 2500 Is Displayed e See Eleven flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action GEEET Other Error Messages e Check If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor check the following e Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk e Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory Quit other running applications to increase available memory If you still cannot print restart your computer and retry printing e Printer driver could not be found Uninstall the printer driver according to the procedure described in Uninstalling the Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 428 of 539 pages Printer Driver and then reinstall it e Could not print Application name File name Try printing again once the current job is complete If the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Exten
158. button to cancel print jobs before turning off the printer If paper is jammed in the Rear Tray the Front Tray or the Front Feed Support Remove the paper following the procedure below 1 Slowly pull the paper out either from the Rear Tray or from the Paper Output Slot whichever is easier Feeding from the Rear Tray Feeding from the Front Tray If the paper tears and a piece remains inside the printer open the Top Cover and remove it Be careful not to touch the components inside the printer After removing all paper close the Top Cover turn the printer off and turn it back on f you cannot pull the paper out turn the printer off and turn it back on The paper may be ejected automatically 2 Reload the paper and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Set the Paper Guide correctly when printing from the Rear Tray The paper may not feed properly if the Paper Guide is not set correctly If you turned off the printer in step 1 all print jobs in the queue are canceled Reprint if necessary Note Paper Jams Page 421 of 539 pages When reloading the paper confirm that you are using the correct paper and are loading it correctly Loading Paper A5 sized paper is suited to printing documents consisting mainly of text We do not recommend using such paper to print documents with photos or graphics since the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams E If you cannot remove the paper or the
159. can load A3 13 x 19 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 Letter Legal 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm Tabloid Wide 4 x 7 1 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm and 10 x 12 25 x 30 cm sizes of paper and envelopes in the Rear Tray Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper 1 Prepare paper Align the edges of paper If paper is curled flatten it Note Align the edges of paper neatly before loading Loading paper without aligning the edges may Cause paper jams f paper is curled hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat For details on how to flatten curled paper refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Load paper 1 Open the Paper Support 2 Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 3 Pull out the Front Tray Extension 4 Make sure that the Front Feed button is not lit If the Front Feed bution is lit or flashing set the Front Tray to its normal printing position See Returning the Front Tray to Its Normal Printing Position Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 35 of 539 pages 1 EET gt i aga 5 Wy Wi I 6 Load the paper in the Rear Tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING YOU Align the paper stack with the right edge of the Rear Tray N Important Always load paper in the portrait orientation A Loading paper in the landsca
160. cation Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Brightener Function Using the Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click S Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears Se Comet Enhance Images A i ett eit Sqeeeeeger SHeenepeaee I um F pi TE ft Lat I E s Ext Ci Uberd UserName ampli jpg EE Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EE Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Face Brightener Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross Using the Face Brightener Function Page 157 of 539 pages Face Esghtenes se 4 Wala j Trei Spp ihi ata sou vari BS gara Tp Face Shapers oo Digdal Fines Sivepcltherry 92 Blemch Remove
161. cement Installing used ink tanks may cause the nozzles to clog Furthermore with such ink tanks the printer will not be able to inform you when to replace the ink tanks properly Once an ink tank has been installed do not remove it from the printer and leave it out in the open This will cause the ink tank to dry out and the printer may not operate properly when it is reinstalled To maintain optimal printing quality use an ink tank within six months of first use Note Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black and white document or when black and white printing is specified Every ink is also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the Print Head which may be necessary to maintain the printer s performance When an ink tank is out of ink replace it immediately with a new one 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and open the Front Tray gently Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 2 Open the Top Cover The Print Head Holder moves to the replacement position AN Caution Do not hold the Print Head Holder to stop or move it forcibly Do not touch the Print Head Holder until it stops completely us Important Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the printer f the Top Cover is left open the Print Head Holder moves to the right In this case close and reopen the Top Cover If you open the Top Cover while the Front Feed button is flashing
162. cer Metts Phin Pipes D Important This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Ee Note Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox this effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Reducing Photo Noise Page 184 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Reducing Photo Noise Easy PhotoPrint EX Reducing Photo Noise When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera noise may appear in the image Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and make the printed photos more vivid ra arnt Easy Dhat at ae tt E Fite Edi View Help Sdectthe printer tous then select thee tone Seed ipee of pacer ba prira aP Exif Print Prever Caran SOK Pager Siret Ales Trey Gepos Pioa Lisa Phoon Pages Sim Dkp Phyo Pacer Metts Phin Popes N Important This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box E Note m When the noise is severe change Normal to Strong The noise reduction effect appli
163. chrome Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set grayscale printing Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab TR Cek Sep SD Man A Page Setup aaf Becta A Martenance Mady Tipe Phats Fager Pro Il Riar Troy Fiag Paper Fro E Legar p S111 71527 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is converted to grayscale data It allows you to print the color document in monochrome eo Important When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked the printer driver processes image data as SRGB data In this case actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data convert the data to sRGB data using an application software EE Note During Grayscale Printing color inks may be used as well as black ink Related Topic Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 300 of 539 pages Adjusting Tone Page top gt Adjusting Tone Page 301 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adj
164. cleaning of the Paper Feed Rollers If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers contact the service center O Page top Opening the Maintenance Screens Page 9 of 539 pages BasicGuide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Opening the Maintenance Screens Opening the Maintenance Screens You can perform maintenance operations from the printer driver setup window Windows or the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh m Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 1 Click Control Panel and Printer under Hardware and Sound When you are using Windows XP Click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printers and Faxes When you are using Windows 2000 Click Control Panel and Printers 2 Right click the Canon XXX icon where XXX is your printer s name and select Printing Preferences The printer driver setup window appears Note You can also open the printer driver setup window from your software application or My Printer on the desktop For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide DF Mkiri Rica gp fm Hi oep mia a en Ad miea mery e rep Oi ia SSCs I1 Pepas bere ore Herdera Frig ee eg Miria p Fiie Mn Slee Ba See ee Coes rere oo in dl m Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh When you are using Mac OS X v 10 5 x 1 Open System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 2 Select your printer
165. click the Canon Utilities folder the Easy PhotoPrint Pro folder and then the Plug In Installer icon 2 Follow the on screen instructions to install Adobe Photoshop Plug In Note lf you have never started up Adobe Photoshop before Adobe Photoshop Plug In cannot be installed Page top Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Page 396 of 539 pages dvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Printing Speed Is Slow Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not Work VVindows This device can perform faster Message Is Displayed If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi Speed USB the printer will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1 1 In this case the printer operates properly but printing speed may slow down due to communication speed e Check Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Hi Speed USB connection e Does the USB port on your computer support Hi Speed USB connection e Do the USB cable and the USB hub if you are using one support Hi Speed USB connection Be sure to use a certified Hi Speed USB cable We recommend that the cable is no longer than around 10 feet 3 meters e Does the operating system of your computer support Hi Speed USB connection Obtain and install the latest update for your computer e Does the Hi Speed USB driver operate properly Obtain the latest version
166. cover the paper with a fresh sheet of plain paper to avoid staining or scratching the surface 2 Roll up the paper as shown below 3 Check to see that the paper curl is within approximately 0 08 to 0 2 inches 2 to 5 mm B in height We recommend printing paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time e Check 4 If you are printing on thick paper select the Prevent paper abrasion setting Selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting will widen the clearance between the Print Head and the loaded paper If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the loaded paper set the printer to prevent paper abrasion by using the printer driver Deactivate the Prevent paper abrasion setting once printing is complete If not this setting remains enabled for all subsequent print jobs Open the printer properties dialog box and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet select the Prevent paper abrasion check box and then click Send To open the printer properties dialog box see Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows In the Canon lJ Printer Utility select Custom Settings in the pop up menu select the Prevent paper abrasion check box and then click Send To open the Canon lJ Printer Utility see Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh e Check 5 If you are printing on board paper or especially thick paper from 0 6 mm 23 mil to 1 2 mm 47 mil select Board Paper f
167. ct Current Document The title of the currently displayed topic is displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list Note By selecting Print linked documents you can also print documents that are linked to the current document The linked documents are added to the Documents to Be Printed list Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 2 Click Start Printing The Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed 3 Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes The topics that are currently displayed are printed Selected Documents You can select and print the topics that you want printed 1 From Select Target select Selected Documents The titles of all topics are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list 2 Select the topics to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select the title check boxes of the topics to be printed Note When you select the Automatically select documents in lower hierarchies check box the check boxes of all titles found in the lower hierarchies are selected Click Select All to select the check boxes of all titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 3 Click Start Printing The Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed 4 Ex
168. cting Bordered Margin 45 When you select the paper smaller than 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm in Paper Size Bordered Margin 45 is not available O Page 15 of 539 pages Page top Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 16 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing Photos Documents gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX mg Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX This section describes a few of the useful functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Creating Your Own Prints You can create an album or calendar using your photos Stickers Layout Print Correcting Images You can use Red Eye Correction Face Sharpener Digital Face Smoothing Brightness Contrast etc to adjust correct or enhance images automatically or manually n ae ee Brightness O C Page top Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 17 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing Photos Documents gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint Pro mg Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint Pro Easy PhotoPrint Pro is a plug in application started from Adobe Photoshop or Digital Photo Professional for Canon brand Single Lens Reflex camera Easy PhotoPrint Pro allows easy performance of various photo prints such as borderless prin
169. d Page 2 of 539 pages G Dia ee ae ee ees Pate ag Ga wa eB Seer ures uses ind kan Pirri ara miin tig ide TH WT a Caren g ois Saag o Uin man a rr ha lee Enni se mi ee ee EEF beeing W ue caring hisen ma ha rhod Te aii ie br rafi v mirri mhara j De r v a ed a A A rE ei y arr prr a alee Sc ea eee meted aah po tard inlay MEY borai oh riim arala mz S enmaren D EDE Eh pbn piik Ehi E ey d cmt Sey Kept eal ney check Corre Hae click engage vo ar Se TEE Ae kd ae el San The ep ae a pma ee ee eed ig ie Pee ged ai 3 The print head alignment pattern will be printed and the printer will adjust the print head position automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the print head alignment pattern This takes about 4 minutes LU Niih SU a t T INN L TLL LL PPOEEITTEE Aligning the Print Head a PULOTNAEE V UL La K zsh e red BE T o e EE T ai f Tama La ray ce i 5 Laat Note f the automatic adjustment of the print head position has failed the Alarm lamp flashes Refer to Eleven flashes of Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide f the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above align the Print Head manually Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Make sure that the
170. d at a time so that you can print continuously Some sizes or types of paper can be loaded only one sheet at a time Select Rear Tray in Paper Source in the printer driver setting when printing from the Rear Tray Loading One Sheet of Large Size Paper or Thick Paper in the Front Tray You can load large size paper such as 14 x 17 36 x 43 cm paper or thick paper such as art paper and board paper in the Front Tray Select Front Tray in Paper Source in the printer driver setting when printing from the Front Tray O Page top Notes on Loading Paper Page 33 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Notes on Loading Paper m Notes on Loading Paper D Important f you cut plain paper into small size such as 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm or 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm to perform trial print it can cause paper jams E Note We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos For details on the Canon genuine paper see Media Types You Can Use You can use general copy paper For the page size and paper weight thickness you can use for the printer see Media Types You Can Use O Page top Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 34 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Rear Tray m Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Before loading paper see Notes on Loading Paper Note You
171. d reproduces images even more vividly than the Perceptual method e Perceptual This method reproduces images by focusing on colors that most people find desirable Select this method to print photos e Relative Colorimetric When image data is converted to the color space of the printer this method converts the image data so the color reproduction approximates the shared color regions Select this method to print image data with colors that are close to the original colors e Abosolute Colorimetric When Relative Colorimetric is selected white spots are reproduced as white spots of the paper background color However when Abosolute Colorimetric is selected how the white spots are Printing with ICC Profiles Page 311 of 539 pages reproduced depends on the image data a Important When Windows XP SP2 or Windows XP SP3 is used this function is disabled 8 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 9 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the color space of the selected image data Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction m Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjustin
172. d until all the images on the frames is decreased pages with the current layout can be fitted Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Page top Changing Background Page 198 of 539 pages Advancedauide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Background Easy PhotoPrint EX Changing Background You can change the background of each page D Important You cannot change the background of the Photo Print Stickers and Layout Print Click Background in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in the Edit screen then click Change Background EE Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create Change Background ma Background Type Select irom samples O Single color Image hle O No background Samples A 4 Spare 00 005 006 Mea m OAA Apply to all pages eere a aa f UK Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box When Select from samples is Selected Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK E Note Select from samples will be displayed
173. ded Survey Program is installed a confirmation screen asking for permission to send the printer usage information will be displayed three months and then six months after the installation After that it will be displayed every six months for about four years Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below SY Canon Inkjet Printen Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program a Thank you for your coopersben n Inkjet Piten scannar Fax Extended Survey Program i For davelooment and marketing of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below recorded in your Canon product be cofected on your computer and sent to Canon through the Intemet Information rebated to Canon inkjet onnter scariner fax 05 version nguegpe and msoby setting nforreton Device diar and appicabon software usage logs Information rebated to Canon inkjet printer fax Pmiters ID number Instalabon date and Ume Ink use nforreton Humber of sheets pooted and Mantenance nionag in the survey we wil not cobect or send any nformation about your computer other than that above or any of your personal nfonration For the reason from the information that amp sent to us we ate umahe to dentiy maait customers o bijo seq Hhoerofnra nnahla Hn recone Pn ramearte Pn deriera sew cedlerfed mfnrmatin If you agree that we collect and send the information above and that we cannot daciose any colected information cick Agree Otherw
174. digital photos Printing from Computers This section first describes the operational flows of printing from computers points to check in shooting settings on digital cameras and the points to check in the application settings Then this section explains how to print from Easy PhotoPrint Pro and from other applications by utilizing your printer s performance Adjusting Colors Flexibly on a Digital Camera before Printing This section explains the advanced functions that can be customized on PictBridge compatible Canon digital cameras Printing in Grayscale This section explains how to print digital photos in grayscale from Easy PhotoPrint Pro and from other applications by utilizing your printer s performance Page top Printer based Digital Photo Printing Page 4 0 of 539 pages il Photo Printing Guide Canon hoto Printing Guide gt Printer based Digital Photo Printing inter based Digital Photo Printing Printing Photos from Digital Photo Data Essential Basics of Color Management Page top Printing Photos from Digital Photo Data Page 471 of 539 pages ital Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printer based Digital Photo Printing gt Printing Photos from Digital Photo Printing Photos from Digital Photo Data igital photo data can only be transformed into photos after being transferred to a computer and inted using a printer nowledge of color management that is unnec
175. dobe Systems Inc If Bitmap Printing takes effect printing may take time or some data may not be printed Print after clearing the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box Page top Appendix Page 438 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix Appendix m XPS Printer Driver Before printing on Art Paper Printing Area Deleting the Undesired Print Job Updating the Printer Driver Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Transporting the Printer Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Sharing the Printer on a Network Page top XPS Printer Driver Page 439 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt XPS Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver The following two printer drivers can be installed on Windows Vista e J printer driver e XPS printer driver In this topic the above drivers are indicated as standard IJ printer driver and XPS printer driver respectively Using the XPS printer driver enables you to print in the High Dynamic Range full 16 bit workflow Use the XPS printer driver only when printing in the High Dynamic Range te Important Touse the XPS printer driver the standard lJ printer driver must already be installed on your compuier Installing the XPS Printer Driver Load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the printer and install
176. dvanced Guide Previous Next Page top Printing from Other Applications Page 507 of 539 pages ital Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Other Applications Printing from Other Applications 1is section explains how to print images from applications other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro in lindows Vista f MEMO e Using the XPS printer driver enables you to print in the High Dynamic Range full 16 bit workflow from Windows Vista Photo Gallery gt gt For details refer to XPS Printer Driver in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide se Printing from Other Applications ase 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space e Source image Adobe RGB or sRGB e Application Applications in which ICC profiles can be set e Print result Image printed according to an input profile using a profile for printing specified within an application ase 2 Printing by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application e Source image Adobe RGB or sRGB e Application Applications in which ICC profiles can be set e Print result Image printed according to an input profile using a profile for printing specified within an application ase 3 Printing from Applications in which ICC Profiles Cannot be Set e Source image Adobe RGB or sRGB e Application Applications in which ICC profiles cannot be set e Print result Image p
177. dvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order gt Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing gt Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing m Saving a Stamp Setting Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background Printing an Envelope Front Feed Printing Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page top Printing with Easy Setup Page 259 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing with Easy Setup Printing with Easy Setup A simple procedure that is necessary for printing data properly with this printer is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings select a printing profile suited for the purpose When you select a printing profile the Additional Features Media Type and Printer Paper Size settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset Wh cance Prod000 Ut series Preting Preferences CE Gack Sep Main 8 Pa
178. e you may have to select a PictBridge compliant print mode on the device before connecting it to the printer You may also have to turn on your device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the printer Perform necessary operations before connecting your device referring to its instruction manual If the error is still not resolved check if you can print another photograph When printing from the Rear Tray return the Front Tray to its normal printing position make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to resume printing Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to return the Front Tray to its normal printing position If you have moved the Front Tray during printing return the Front Tray to the correct position then press the RESUME CANCEL bution on the printer and try printing again Do not move the Front Tray during printing When performing Automatic Print Head Alignment e Print Head nozzles are clogged Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the Print Head Routine Maintenance e Paper of size other than A4 or Letter is loaded in the Rear Tray Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error then load two sheets of A4 Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray For Automatic Print Head Alignment always load paper on the Rear Tray e The Paper Output Slot is exposed to s
179. e 8 cm CD R Adapter with indentations on the CD R Tray Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page 340 of 539 pages 3 Attach the CD R Tray to the printer D Important Do not attach the CD R Tray while the printer is in operation Power lamp is blinking Note The printer may eject the CD R Tray while it is preparing for printing In this case wait until the Power lamp stops blinking and stays lit then follow the on screen instructions to attach the CD R Tray again 4 Insert the CD R Tray straight until the arrow lt on the Inner Cover is almost aligned with the arrow gt on the CD R Tray Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page 341 of 539 pages 0 E Align the arrow gt on the CD R Tray with the arrow J on the Inner Cover D Important Do not insert the CD R Tray beyond the arrow lt J on the Inner Cover Removing the CD R Tray 1 Pull out the CD R Tray 2 Close the Inner Cover oe Important If the Inner Cover is opened you cannot print on paper as it will not feed properly Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed 3 Remove the DVD CD from the CD R Tray D Important Do not touch the printing surface when removing the disc from the CD R Tray Note Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page 342 of 539 pages Dry the printing surface sufficiently before removing the disc If you see printing on the CD R Tray or the transparent parts on inner or outer diameter of DVD CD
180. e Correct Enhance Images window Auto Photo Fix This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections m Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash Using the Red Eye Correction Function Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background Using the Face Brightener Function Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo Using the Face Sharpener Function Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles Using the Blemish Remover Function Image Adjustment You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color Adjusting Images Page top Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 151 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Apply optimum corrections automatically to the photos used for an album calendar etc D Important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to a
181. e Photoshop CS Adobe Photoshop CS2 Adobe Photoshop CS3 Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or Digital Photo Professional Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Print from Other Applications Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application Check this flow when you want to open then edit retouch a digital camera photo in an application other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro such as Adobe Photoshop or an application supplied with a digital camera and print it by specifying an ICC profile within the application Printing from Other Applications Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application Print from Other Applications Specifying an ICC Profile in the Driver Check this flow when you want to start the printing process from an application in which ICC profiles cannot be set Such as an application for simple photo printing and specify an ICC profile in the Print Settings screen of the driver Printing from Other Applications Specifying an ICC Profile in the Driver Overview of Printing from Computers Page 481 of 539 pages Next Page top Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 482 of 539 pages il Photo Printing Guide Canon hoto Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Which application do you want to print from a Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Capture Operations in Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible applications Open an imag
182. e captured with a digital camera in Adobe Photoshop CS Adobe Photoshop CS2 Adobe Photoshop C53 Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or Digital Photo Professional Adobe RGB Want to adit retouch an the source color space sRGB image and print Adobe RGB or sRGB the resulting image Click Color Adjustment Click Color Adjustment Click Color Adjustment Open Color Manage Open Color Manage ment tab ment tab Color Mode Color Mode Enable ICC Profile Linear Tone Printer Profile Auto Open Color Marage ment tab Color Mode Fhoto Color Detailed Operations When you want to print by utilizing the color space of the source ICC profile Adobe RGB or SRGB Page 483 of 539 pages Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 484 of 539 pages Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space When you want to edit retouch sRGB images in Adobe Photoshop CS Adobe Photoshop CS2 Adobe Photoshop CS3 Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or Digital Photo Professional and print the resulting images Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images When you want to print SRGB images in popular color tones using Canon Digital Photo Color Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones f MEMO e In Windows Vista you
183. e color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used O Page top Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 306 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print SRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them use a printing ICC profile in the application software and select settings for color management The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab CEFA E Man E Page Setup af Beca AA Martienance Pita Pager Fro E Lemar BS 11 215 Se ae 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast for Print Quality D Important Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings
184. e confirmation message appears click Yes When all the files have been deleted click Complete The deletion of the printer driver is completed If There is No Uninstaller If there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows Vista follow these steps 1 Select the printer to be deleted Select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click the model to delete then press the Alt key on your keyboard On the File menu click Delete 2 Delete the printer If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Then when the confirmation message appears click Yes The icon is deleted 3 Select the printer driver to be deleted Press the Alt key On the File menu select Run as administrator and then click Sever Properties If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Click the Drivers tab In the Installed printer drivers list click the printer to delete 4 Delete the printer driver When you click Remove Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed Select Remove driver and driver package and then click OK In the confirmation dialog box click Yes When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box click Delete Uninstalling the Printer Driver Page 451 of 539 pages 5 Click OK The deletion of the printer driver is complete a Important You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed pr
185. e covers on the printer to keep them from opening during transportation Then pack the printer in the plastic bag 6 Attach the protective material to the printer when packing the printer D Important Pack the printer with the Print Head and ink tanks left installed in the printer Note Clearly label the box as FRAGILE or HANDLE WITH CARE Page top Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Page 456 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing 1 Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer properties dialog box opens Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print h
186. e printing uncheck the check box Related Topic Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page top Printing on DVD CDs Page 335 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs Printing on DVD CDs Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Troubleshooting Page top Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Page 336 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Items to Prepare Cautions When Printing on DVD CDs Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer Printing Area Page top ltems to Prepare Page 337 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Items to Prepare Items to Prepare The following items are needed to print on DVD CDs e CD R Tray E is on the upper side e 8 cm CD R Adapter Needed only when printing on 8 cm DVD CDs Attached to the CD R Tray when shipped e Printable DVD CDs Obtain a 12 cm or 8 cm DVD CD with a label surface compatible with inkjet printing A printable disc differs from regular DVD CDs in that its label surface has been specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer Page top Cautions When Printing on DVD CDs Page 338 of 539 pages Sdva
187. e the following section Printing from Other Applications Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space When the ICC Profile is Not Embedded or when Printing sRGB Images Using the Driver s Color Correction Function Select the item that allows the printer to manage colors For example in Adobe Photoshop select Printer Manages Colors for Color Handling For printer settings see the following sections Printing from Other Applications Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Printing from Other Applications Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Printing with a Specific ICC Profile When you want to specify a custom profile check that an input profile is set select the item that allows the application to manage colors then specify the custom profile For example in Adobe Photoshop select Photoshop Manages Colors for Color Handling and specify the custom profile in Printer Profile At this time please clear the Black Point Compensation checkbox memo e When you need to specify the printer profile select the ICC profile for the paper to print on The ICC profiles installed for this printer appear as follows Canon AAAAX PR 1 et PA D 3 1 Printer model name 2 Media type Each pair of letters represents its respective media type PR Photo Paper Pro II PT Photo Paper Pro Platinum GL Photo Paper Plus Glossy II MP Matte Photo Paper SG Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss 3 Pri
188. ead and improves deviated colors and lines This printer supports two head alignment methods automatic head alignment and manual head alignment Normally the printer is set for automatic head alignment If the printing results are unsatisfactory even after you execute automatic head alignment see Manual Print Head Alignment and execute manual head alignment To change to the manual head alignment click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab and then check the Align heads manually check box The procedure for performing print head alignment is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window Print Head Alignment 2 Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens 3 Load paper in the printer Load two sheets of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray 4 Execute head alignment Make sure that the printer is on and click Align Print Head Follow the instruction in the message Note To check the current setting before you adjust the print head position click Print Alignment Value Page top gt Manual Print Head Alignment Page 368 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Manual Print Head Alignment Manual Print Head Alignment This section describes how to align the Print Head manually If the results of Automatic Print Head Alignment are not satisfactory follo
189. ead cleaning or to configure print settings that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer properties dialog box opens NY Important Opening the printer properties dialog box through Properties displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software About tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows Page top Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh Page 457 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh You can open the Page Setup dialog box and the Print dialog box from the application program you are USING Opening the Page Setup Dialog Box Open the Page Setup dialog box to specify page paper settings before printing 1 Select Page Setup on the File menu in your application program The Page Setup dialog
190. eaning the Exterior of the Printer Page 361 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Be sure to use a soft cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning D Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the printer Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials as this may scratch the surface Page top Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer Page 362 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer If protrusions inside the printer are stained wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like D Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the printer Do not touch A and B inside of the printer when cleaning A Page top Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page 363 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers gt Aligning the Print Head Positio
191. ear when the compression rate is reased and that the data degrades after being processed repeatedly if Print allows you to print by utilizing the information embedded in images captured with a ital camera Exif 2 2 images captured with a digital camera appear in the sRGB color space en opened in an application but are saved in the sYCC color space that is larger than the GB color space erefore by utilizing the sYCC color space you can print Exif 2 2 images in a larger color space in the SRGB color space u can print by utilizing the information embedded in images captured with a digital camera ing Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with this printer For details refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint EX in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top Points to Check in the Application Settings Page 493 of 539 pages ital Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Points to Check in the Application Settings Points to Check in the Application Settings his section explains the points to check and the procedures in applications when specifying ICC ofiles in applications other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro using Adobe Photoshop CS3 as an lt ample s Checking the Application Settings fter Opening an image captured with a digital camera in an application in which ICC profiles can e set you will need to check the input status of the image and also check that
192. ect them automatically to orint images most suitable for the midtone luminance Exposure can be compensated even if set incorrectly when capturing an image Auto The darkest blackest and brightest whitest parts of an image are detected and luminance is adjusted to the most appropriate level Adjusting Colors before Printing Page 528 of 539 pages Manual Specify the darkest blackest and brightest whitest parts and adjust the luminance to the desired level Face brightener Brightens dark faces caused by bright backgrounds Red eye corr Red eye correction Corrects red eyes in images caused by camera flashes sx Customizing Contrast Saturation Color tone and Color balance er selecting Natural M in Image Optimize Print Effect you can customize Contrast Saturation lor tone and Color balance in Detail set Contrast Adjustment You can adjust the sharpness of the entire image by increasing reducing the contrast of the midtone luminance without changing the colors of the darkest blackest and brightest whitest parts You can improve images lacking sharpness by increasing the contrast to turn them into sharp images Brightest whitest part A Reduce Darkest blackest part Saturation Adjustment You can adjust the vividness of the entire image by increasing reducing saturation without changing the colors of the darkest blackest part gray axis and brightest
193. ecute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All topics with selected check boxes are printed My Manual You can select and print topics registered in My Manual For details about My Manual see Registering Topics to My Manual 1 From Select Target select My Manual The titles of the topics that have been registered to My Manual are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list 2 Select the topics to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select the title check boxes of the topics to be printed Note Printing This Manual Page 98 of 539 pages Click Select All to select the check boxes of all titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 3 Click Start Printing The Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed 4 Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All topics with selected check boxes are printed All Documents You can print all topics of the on screen manual 1 From Select Target select All Documents The titles of all topics are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list and the check boxes are automatically selected Note If you clear the check box of a topic that topic is not printed Click Select All to select the check boxes of all titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes
194. ed Application Software gt Adjust the Colors of Photo gt Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns You can print a pattern of an image and adjust the color balance of the image based on the pattern 1 Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the bottom right area of the screen EA Note m See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 Click Color Adjustment in the Printer Settings window EET ranan Eam akn ha ES Canon Eary ProtoPrnt Pro ile View Help se saead ior The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Click Pattern Print Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Page 242 of 539 pages Wer tror i isect to Cal toad SWEPT Corechion Color Managemen BlackAwhite The Pattern Print window appears 4 Select Color for Pattern Print then select the color direction in which you want to adjust Dh ica TePN TNT EEE Y RN TUTE EVENS FEES E TO TEES IEEE PEE ESET Y PEE ETE TELE EET EEE ETE EEE ELT T EEE ETE TELE EET EPP E TE EPL YN TET PELE YET E PEEP EE TET T EEE PEEP ET PEE Tere E EET Tere TTT Patiem Fan S etireag Disg the whia lines bo mage thes pri eee ETEN Faja Se EE Note Select Print in ALL Directions to print a pattern of the image adjusted in the following six directions The image with the current color balance values is printed in the center Use the
195. ed mi aT E Cees Sherer Coke Saar Co 2 oar kie erie a Hm 3 Select the ink group to clean Note f there are horizontal white streaks in the nozzle check pattern of BK R G PC or PM select Group 1 If there are horizontal white streaks in the nozzle check pattern of C M or Y select Group 2 For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click Execute The printer starts cleaning the Print Head when the Power lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 1 minute 30 seconds Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head ars there rie ged pmi eed eee Slee ihe ee pra bee eg 2 yee ee re pe kar a ERR cn a aS 4 5 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Check the printed nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Note f the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice clean the Print Head deeply See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If you click Cleaning on the Pattern Check dialog box that appears after printing the nozzle check pattern the printer starts cleaning the Print
196. em they may be grayed out In this case change the settings from the print server When you change the settings of the print server you should delete the icon of the shared printer from the client system and then specify the shared settings again in the client system If the same printer driver is installed in the print server system and the client system as the local printer e The net crawl function may automatically create a network printer icon on the client system O Page top gt Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 465 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily Start Easy PhotoPrint EX wae Click Here Easy PhotoPrint EX EE Note See the section below for details on how to use Easy PhotoPrint EX m Printing with the Bundled Application Software Create a Personalized Photo Album Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy PhotoPrint EX All you need to do is select which photos to use select a layout then load paper into your printer and print After you bind the printed sheets you ll have the one and only album of your memories You can change the layout and background and attach comments to photos You
197. embed an input ICC profile tag into a RAW file by using special application software Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data The recommended printing method depends on the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data or the application software to be used There are two typical printing methods Check the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data and the application software to be used and then select the printing method suited to your purpose Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver e To print using Canon Digital Photo Color The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer reproducing colors of the original image data and producing three dimensional effects and high sharp contrasts e To print by directly applying editing and touch up results of an application software When printing the data the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact When printing the data the printer applies fine adjustment results such as brightness adjustments made with an application software Printing with ICC Profiles Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so that th
198. ement to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Enhancement 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross ge Rajya Comection p Fico Brefi oo Face 3 recor 1 3 r Weak ake Biga Sai Let A pl eee Lo Sel oe Bleach Peamower 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 163 of 539 pages Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit a Important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 164 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Softw
199. en it and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer If the error still remains when the Front Tray or the Front Feed Support is opened paper may be jammed Remove the jammed paper reload paper in the printer and then press the RESUME CANCEL bution Paper Jams Four flashes e lf the lamp on the ink tank is not lit the ink tank may not Ink tank is not installed properly Ink be installed properly may have run out Install an appropriate ink tank e lf the lamp on the ink tank is flashing ink may have run out Replacing the ink tank is recommended If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing press the RESUME CANCEL button with the ink tank installed Then printing can continue Replacing the ink tank is recommended after the printing The printer may be damaged if printing is continued under the ink out condition Routine Maintenance Note If multiple ink lamps are flashing refer to Routine Maintenance and confirm the status of each ink tank Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Five flashes Print Head is not installed Print Head is defective Six flashes The Inner Cover is opened Seven flashes Ink tank is not installed in the correct position Eight flashes Ink absorber is almost full Nine flashes The printer has not received a response from the digital camera The digital camera or digital video camcorder connected is not compatible with this printer Ten flashes The Front Tray is
200. en no print data is sent for a certain interval Specify this setting in the Maintenance sheet of the printer driver setup window Windows or in the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh For details on the settings refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 11 Power lamp Lights green after flashing when the power is turned on 12 RESUME CANCEL button Press to cancel a print job in progress You can press this button after resolving a printer error to dismiss an error message and resume printing 13 Alarm lamp Lights or flashes orange when an error such as paper out or ink out occurs Note Power and Alarm lamps You can check the status of the printer by the Power and Alarm lamps Main Components Page 9 of 539 pages Power lamp is off The power is off Power lamp lights green The printer is ready to print Power lamp flashes green The printer is getting ready to print or printing is in progress Alarm lamp flashes orange An error has occurred and the printer is not ready to print For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Power lamp flashes green once and Alarm lamp flashes orange once alternately An error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 14 Front Feed button Press it when feeding paper from the Front Tray You can check the printer status by t
201. ens may vary depending on what you create Add Text in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text Tet Poston 4 Sre Colac i Linea A ima of gare re all ai pa a __ herie Sosin Po trey zi g UH anma Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text E Note Inthe Edit Text Box dialog box you can change the position angle and size of the text You can also set the color and line of the text box See Help for details To change the entered text select it and click Edit Text Box The Edit Text Box dialog box appears You can change the text Page top Saving Page 211 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Saving Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Saving You can save edited items Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen EA Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create Cherk ghum ping gattngs Chee the Print Button to priini with the garent petinggi Printing starts Prevper Canon x Copies r Paper Saar Ad Pager Sera Media Typa Photo Paper Pis Glossy itr Print Quality Standard x f Cupless Pintrig Duair Seti F Mondera Prievteg C Agvancad A memory of sunnier
202. ent will be divided into several pages during printing After all poster pages have been printed paste the pages together to create a poster Printing Only Specific Pages If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing you can print the pages you still need by following the procedure below 1 Set the print range In the Settings Preview on the left of the Page Setup tab click the pages that do not need to be printed The pages that were clicked are deleted and only the pages to be printed are displayed Poster Printing Page 2 5 of 539 pages SH Caner ProP000 I serves Printing Preferences TR Case Seto E Main Sa Page Setup gf Ettects ff Martenance E Page Sre 2 Orientation a i Porm E Feme 189 deyer 3B Freer Peer See Letter SI Fea Ly Foer E a a ag ia Paper Fro I F pba Bordetess Fitto Page Page Leyout ED Lasar 2211 215 Serpe EE Note Click the deleted pages to display them again Right click the Settings Preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages 2 Complete the setup After completing the page selection click OK When you execute print only specified pages will be printed Ny Important When Poster is selected the Duplex Printing and Print from Last Page check boxes and the Staple Side list box appear grayed out and are unavailable Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it the print results may become coarse Page top gt Booklet Prin
203. er refer to Uninstalling the Printer Driver Related Topics Before Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Page top Uninstalling the Printer Driver Page 450 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver gt Uninstalling the Printer Driver Uninstalling the Printer Driver The printer driver you no longer use can be deleted When deleting the printer driver first exit all programs that are running The procedure to delete the unnecessary printer driver is as follows If There is an Uninstaller 1 Start the uninstaller e In Windows Vista or Windows XP select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt Printer Driver Uninstaller e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Programs gt Your model name gt Printer Driver Uninstaller The Printer Driver Uninstaller dialog box is displayed D Important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue If you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning 2 Execute the uninstaller Click Execute When th
204. er Page 86 of 539 pages m Lamp on the printer is flashing What can do Alarm lamp is flashing orange A B A B C A Alarm lamp flashes B Alarm lamp is off C Alarm lamp flashes repeatedly Your printer has an error Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide then resolve the error Power lamp flashes green once and Alarm lamp flashes orange once alternately An error that requires repair has occurred Contact the service center m Colors are uneven and print results are blurred Tip Print the nozzle check pattern to check if the nozzles are clogged If the print head nozzles are clogged colors may become uneven or the print results may be blurred E aa In this case Print the nozzle check pattern Check the printed check pattern to see if the nozzles are clogged See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect m How can adjust color tones of the photos to print You can make detailed settings to adjust colors with Easy PhotoPrint Pro or the printer driver For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 87 of 539 pages Adjust the intensity of each color Cyan Magenta and Yellow in the color balance setting HAD ACT i id I i hk _ ki f Default Color correction applied Select the cool tone or warm tone in grayscale printing F rr F
205. er Paper Size 4 Select Landscape in Orientation Note f the print result is upside down select Rotate 180 degrees on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver setup window 1 Select Envelope in Media Type 2 Select DL Envelope or 10 Envelope in Paper Size 3 Select the landscape orientation in Orientation oe Important f you do not specify Printer Paper Size or Paper Size or Orientation properly the address will be printed upside down or will be turned to 90 degrees Note For details on the printer driver settings see Printing Documents Windows or Printing Documents Macintosh When printing starts the printer may not detect the envelope correctly depending on the type of envelope If the Alarm lamp flashes orange eleven times set the printer driver not to detect the width of the paper Refer to Error Regarding the Width of Paper Is Displayed in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide Page 38 of 539 pages Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 39 of 539 pages O Page top Loading Paper in the Front Tray Page 40 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Front Tray m Loading Paper in the Front Tray Before loading paper see Notes on Loading Paper D Important When loading paper in the Front Tray the paper sticks out from the back of the printer Keep a space of 15 7 inches 40 cm for this purpo
206. er caps the Print Head nozzles automatically to prevent from drying If you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet or turn off the extender cable connector before the Power lamp is turned off the Print Head will not be capped properly and this will cause drying or clogging To disconnect the power plug be sure to follow this procedure e Print periodically Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time even if it is capped the Print Head too may become dried or clogged if the printer has not been used for a long time We recommend the printer to be used at least once a month Note Depending on the type of paper ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or paint stick or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area E Does the printer need to be handled with care when using or transporting ip Do not use or transport the printer vertically or slanted If the printer is used or transported vertically or slanted the printer may become damaged or ink may leak from the printer Be sure not to use or transport the printer vertically or slanted Tip Do not place any object on the Top Cover Do not place any object on the Top Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Top Cover is opened and cause the printer to malfunction Also place the printer where objects will not fall on it Tips on How to Use Your Print
207. er of the Front Tray to open it D Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 69 of 539 pages See Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 5 Clean the Print Head deeply 1 Make sure that Cleaning is selected in the pop up menu 2 Click Deep Cleaning Camia i Pime inik Peedi gece 1 om Chanig Ciriimaiss umaariad ered ges arri lirei n the prier ea fop Caarirg lieciegi acain ibai comma be charad by regula eg rri ot Mps igi F Pree papt miga dig pririitg 2 Soler Lise T j Esgputii priri tobar chegeig So TAAI pH leet iy 3 Select the ink group to clean deeply Note f there are horizontal white streaks in the nozzle check pattern of BK R G PC or PM select Groupi If there are horizontal white streaks in the nozzle check pattern of C M or Y select Group2 For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click OK The printer starts cleaning the Print Head deeply when the Power lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the deep cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 2 minutes Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head deeply Tap Care Uincioge merek thet emnet Ee demei fy regular caring Saket the harge iib gr
208. er to match the real scenes hese two characteristics no degradation from corrections and the ability to adjust on a omputer to match the real scenes have made it possible to transform pictures in your mind into ctual images as you wish This is the main reason for the use of RAW is recommended that you capture images according to your own requirements For example apture snapshots as compressed data and capture photos for an exhibition in RAW format to be ble to adjust them to your satisfaction Processing RAW Images for Adjustments list Check Adjust the white balance You can adjust the white balance when processing RAW images with a specialized application Source RAW image After white balance adjustment Points to Check in the Digital Camera Settings Page 492 of 539 pages Fo Check2 Adjust the contrast You can change gradations of captured images Increase or decrease contrast to change their impressions Source RAW image After contrast adjustment ssUtilizing Characteristics of Compressed Data ages captured with a digital camera are normally compressed and saved in JPEG format me photo printing applications only support JPEG format advantage of compressed images is that you can process and print them from various photo nting applications In addition compression of images allows you to reduce the file size and to ve more photos on a memory card wever you need to be aware that noise tends to app
209. er to the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top Case 2 Printing by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application Page 512 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Other Applications gt Case 2 1g by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application ase 2 Printing by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application int an edited retouched image by using the ICC profile for printing specified within the plication when input ICC profiles can be identified set in an application other than Easy notoPrint Pro 4 Advice rmally the ICC profiles required for this printer are installed automatically when a driver is stalled Therefore you can print using the color space of the source ICC profile Adobe RGB or 1GB by following the steps in Case 1 low these steps when using a custom profile or a new downloaded profile for Canon brand per 1 Specifying an ICC Profile within an Application 1 Open the image you want to print in an application other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro Edit retouch the image as needed 2 Check that the correct ICC profile has been assigned select the item that allows the application to manage colors then specify the profile for printing For example in Adobe Photoshop select Photoshop Manages Colors then set a profile as the printer profile At this time please clear the Black
210. ere is sufficient ink left for printing Ink lamp is flashing Flashing slowly at around 3 second intervals o g le Repeats Ink is low You can continue printing for a while but we recommend you to have a new ink tank available Flashing fast at around 1 second intervals ie ei Repeats The ink tank is installed in the wrong position or it is empty Make sure that the ink tank is installed in the correct position as indicated by the label on the Print Head Holder If the position is correct but the lamp flashes the ink tank is empty Replace it with a new one Ink lamp is off The ink tank is not installed properly or the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled If the ink tank is not installed properly press the mark E3 Push on the ink tank until the ink tank clicks into place If it does not click into place make sure that the orange protective cap has been removed from the bottom of the ink tank If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled replace the ink tank with a new one See Replacing Procedure If the ink lamp is still off after reinstalling the ink tank there has been an error and the printer cannot print Check the Alarm lamp on the printer Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide With the Computer Screen You can confirm the status of each ink tank with the printer status monitor Windows or the Canon Checking the Ink Stat
211. eries Advanced Guide Page 91 of 539 pages Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations Canon lJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Preview Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device About PictBridge Print Settings Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Cannot Install the Printer Driver Cannot Install the Application Program Easy PhotoPrint Pro Does Not Start up or Easy PhotoPrint Pro Menu Does Not Appear Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Printing Speed Is Slow Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not Work This device can perform faster Message Is Displayed Print Results Not Satisfactory Cannot Print to End of Job No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Lines Are Misaligned Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Printing Does Not Start Printing Stops Before It Is
212. es only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 185 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Cropping Photos Photo Print Cropping Photos Photo Print Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions Click Q Crop Image in the Layout Print screen or double click the preview image Move the white frame to the portion to print and click OK EA Note To move the cropping area place the cursor within the white frame and drag it Drag the white lines to enlarge reduce the cropping area Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines To create a balanced composition drag any of the intersecting points white squares or white broken lines over the main subject of the photo The cropping effect applies only to the print result The original image will not be cropped See Help for details on the Crop window Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 186 of 539 pages Page top Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Page 187 of 539 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Print
213. es stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is moved to the left For example if cyan becomes weaker the color red becomes stronger You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK Adjusting Color Balance Page 313 of 539 pages h ABCDEF 1234567 D Important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the document is printed with the adjusted color balance us Important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Cyan Magenta and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Brightness Page 314 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors The following sample shows the print result when the Brightness specification
214. especially useful when printing low resolution images from Web pages The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Perform Image Optimizer Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab Ost Canon Pret000 0 series Pring Preferences ER cose Seton Ep Man Page Satan of tects A Martenance Photo Paper Fro T i BS ei 215 2 3 Complete the setup Click OK The photos and graphics will be printed with jagged outlines smoothed EE Note Depending on application software or resolution of image data the Image Optimizer may have no discernible effects m It may take longer to complete printing if the Image Optimizer is used Page top gt Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 324 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images It is specially designed to compensate for color shift overexposure and underexposure The procedure for performing Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the Auto Photo mode Check the Photo Optimizer PRO check box on the Effects tab Of Canes Prod000 0 se
215. essary for developing silver salt films is required r this process his section explains the differences between silver salt film cameras and digital cameras as ell as the points to check when printing digital photos a Taking Creative Photos Using Digital Cameras schnological advances in digital cameras over the last few years have been remarkable hen digital single lens reflex cameras were first released they were only used by professional 10tographers with extensive knowledge Today digital cameras especially compact models fe popular among many professionals and amateurs thanks to their ease of use and affordable ices Ihy do professionals and amateurs use digital cameras Here are just some of the major dvantages of digital cameras Large capacity memory cards can be used There are no problems with things like replacing film and rewind failure Framed images can be checked on the LCD and captured images can be checked on the spot There is no need to wait for images to be developed before seeing the results e Captured images can be printed from computers There is no need to stay in a dark room or to send films away to be developed and printed e Working with a computer leads us into a new world of retouching that allows you to correct exposure contrast etc after capturing images to reproduce the real scenes Users are fairly limited in terms of what can be done with color adjustments i
216. estart your computer If the icon is still not displayed try different discs and see if they are displayed If other discs are displayed there is a problem with the Setup CD ROM In this case contact the service center e If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen Printer Connection Make sure that the printer is connected to the computer and tum on the printer STEP I Setup Printer Connection Prim Head Alignment maalaan Mesults STEP 4 Information The printer is not detected Check tha connection If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged into the USB port of the printer and is connected to the computer and then follow the procedure below to reinstall the printer driver Cannot Install the Printer Driver Page 394 of 539 pages Note In Windows Vista The printer is not detected Check the connection may be displayed depending on the computer you use In this case wait for a while If you still cannot proceed to the next step follow the procedure below to reinstall the printer driver 1 Click Cancel on the Printer Connection screen 2 Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen 3 Click Back on the screen that appears next 4 Click Exit on the PIXMA XXX screen then remove the CD ROM 5 Turn the printer off 6 Restart the computer 7 Make sure that you have no applic
217. execute print the image will be printed so that it looks hand drawn Page top gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 321 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color Representing Image Data with a Single Color With the Monochrome Effects function you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a photograph to a sepia tone image The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Monochrome Effects Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color If you use Select Color move the Color slider to specify the color you want The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the printer driver DA casei Set Mars Sa Page Setup wf Bfects gi Martenance Prato Paper Pro Later 69 11 215 dee 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with a single color w Important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Monochrome Effects appears grayed out and is unavailable Page top Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Page 322 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Appl
218. fh Canea PreS000 fl series Printing Preferences TR casei Sep Man 23 Page Setup ook Efect fi Martenance El Page Sy a Page Last ed e N D a BS 182 0297 Drm Nomabsine Borbsiess Fito Page Scaled Page Layout e Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box ER tek Set Ep Man BI Page Set gt Boeta Ml Martenance El Page Sie C a Onertation a E Perm A Leribe ae aS Feee Pocer Sze Leter ASH Poe Layout Socata a B H 5 Fhag Paper Fro E T 2 Laer BS 117 215 Se2 79 dee Moemalaize Bagchee Fito FPage Scaled Page Layout The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the printer driver 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the specified scale N Important Ifthe application software with which you created the original has the scaled printing function configure the settings on your application software You do not need to also configure the same setting in the printer driver When Scaled is selected the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable when Duplex Printing is not selected EE Note Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document Page top gt Page Layout Printing Page 2 1 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application
219. framed photos EE Note Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images ona selected page at one time See Help for details on frames Page top Printing Dates on Photos Page 207 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Printing Dates on Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX S Printing Dates on Photos You can print dates on images E Select the image you want to print the date in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box h j L Edit Image E Postion amp Size Show date Text Orientation AAG Landscape ef Poret _ Bottom Fight ii Font Size ledun _ Apply to all images Select the Show date checkbox Set the Text Orientation Position Font Size and Color then click OK D Important You cannot print dates on framed images ES Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Page top Attaching Comments to Photos Page 208 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Attaching Comments to Photos Easy PhotoPrint Ex We Attaching Commen
220. g Blea Specify Thumbnail Size in the thumbnail window Click E Clear Image Selection to cancel all selections O Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 233 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Paper Size Media Type Paper Source 20h sa G d eras Number of imager 4 Paper Size fd Media Type Photo Paper Pius isicasy I D Important When Fine Art is selected for Paper Size a 1 38 inch 35 mm margin is automatically left at the top and bottom of the paper It is recommended that you check the print range with the image shown in Preview before printing EE Note The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer m The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type Select the XPS printer driver Your model name XPS for Printer to print in the High Dynamic Range full 16 bit workflow See XPS Printer Driver for details on the XPS printer driver 2 Select a print quality from Print Quality Ee Note The available print quality options may vary depending on the printer and media type 3 Select a layout from Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout
221. g Color Balance Page 312 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints during printing Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color it changes the total color balance of the document Use the application software if you want to change the color balance significantly Use the printer driver only if you want to adjust the color balance slightly The following sample shows the case when Color Balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform No adjustment Adjusted in Color Balance The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Mada Tipe Photo Facer Pro Il h an zs i ET Pre Th k Seno Phat Paper Fro Lemar B11 215 Soe The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust color balance There are individual sliders for Cyan Magenta and Yellow Each color becom
222. g Inside the Printer Overview of the Printer Driver Canon lJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Preview Updating the Printer Driver Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Uninstalling the Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Appendix Deleting the Undesired Print Job Sharing the Printer on a Network Canon lJ Printer Driver Page 330 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver Canon lJ Printer Driver The Canon lJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this printer The Canon lJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand and sends the converted data to the printer Because different models support different print data formats you need a Canon lJ printer driver for the specific model you are using How to Use Help You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the Printing Preferences screen of the Canon lJ printer driver e To view all descriptions of a tab Click the Help button on each tab A dialog box opens displaying a description of each item on the tab You can also click the link found in the description
223. g box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX by icon view only for Windows Vista or thumbnail view D Important a When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Edit screen appears EA Note Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats extensions Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 Easy PhotoPrint EX Stickers file el2 Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file e14 Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 CD LabelPrint data cld 3 Edit the file if necessary EE Note See the following sections for details on the editing procedures Editing Album m Editing Calendar m Editing Stickers gt Editing Layout Print Opening Saved Files Page 216 of 539 pages Note You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Double click or click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Page top What Is Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 21 7 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint Pro What Is Easy PhotoPrint Pro Easy PhotoPrint Pro is a plug in f
224. g rewarding photos st s look at the following points Fo Check1 Are printed colors the same as the colors shown on the images taken he printed colors are different from the colors shown on the images taken The printed colors 3 not match the colors on the monitor One cause of such complaints about colors is incorrectly anfigured color management settings Follow the link below and learn about the basics of color lanagement and the required environment Essential Basics of Color Management Fo Check2 Are the digital camera settings correct int results are affected by camera settings and data type ollow the link below to learn more about digital camera settings Points to Check in the Digital Camera Settings Fe Check3 Check the operational flow from taking the picture to printing it rint settings should be configured according to the application used for editing and the type of ata to be printed Follow the link below to check the application and data that you are using and find the settings that best meet your requirements Overview of Printing from Computers Fo Check4 Are the application settings correct Printing Photos from Digital Photo Data Page 473 of 539 pages JU Open data in an application and print it with an incorrect ICC profile the printed photo will be what you want Follow the link below to learn about the procedures for checking opened a type and for specifying an ICC profile Poi
225. g the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Layout Print from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Sgert paai pe aig n Genna Settings then select a Byowt Afer poer ng DRIN pae oti HCG fo the Saker Images eraan Gener Setiny Elert date Date Settings AJ Landecane HE dE 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings 3 Select a layout from Layouts EE Note The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation E Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 146 of 539 pages Advanced amide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears i ay r ayani Prnt Eaqy PhotePrant E Ble Edt Wew Hep Sekak images for yout printing You can asa addiepbee mages biarin the edgng procash To donei oF anhy mages Chk the Comag Enhance butia ASE OS TORTS aod GMA COTE TS in Top QR Sraan a sor by Date Aw Meot
226. g the Printer Noise e Check 2 Is the print quality set too high Increase the printing speed setting in the printer driver Setting to prioritize soeed makes printing faster 1 Open the printer properties dialog box Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows vo Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Fast for the Print Quality setting Depending on the media type the Fast option may not be available acintosh 1 Open the Print dialog box m Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh 2 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu and then select Fast for the Print Quality setting Depending on the media type the Fast option may not be available Note a Printing speed may not improve noticeably by following the instructions above depending on your system environment Page top Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Page 416 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing e Check 1 Is the Power lamp off Check if the Power lamp is lit green The Print Head Holder will not move unless the power is on If the Power lamp is off close the Top Cover and turn the printer on While t
227. gain The registered title appears in the Stamp list Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp 1 Click Define Stamp in the Stamp Background dialog box The Stamp Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the stamp to be deleted Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab Then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again oC Page top gt Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 286 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used You can select a bitmap file and save it as a new background You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing background An unnecessary background can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab El Page Spe Letter SSN a Osentation a i Pony o Eae 180 degrees A j z a E F r ih At FERTA MaA E Sere 6 Pa
228. gapixels From A4 Leiter to sizes smaller than A3 Legal From 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm to A4 Letter 048 x 1536 approx 3 1 megapixels 048 x 1360 approx 2 8 megapixels 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm 728 x 1152 approx 2 0 megapixels 600 x 1200 approx 1 9 megapixels 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 536 x 1024 approx 1 6 megapixels ssPrinting Rewarding Photos from RAW Data lthough it is more usual to compress and save captured images in JPEG format some digital ameras allow you to capture images in RAW format AW is a file format designed for computer based image processing RAW is supported not only y digital single lens reflex cameras but also by some compact digital cameras and it is quite ommon for many professionals and amateurs to capture images in RAW format AW images cannot be printed from photo printing applications in most cases and an image rocessing application is required to adjust white balance contrast etc In addition RAW images re larger in terms of the number of recorded pixels than images captured in other formats hen why is RAW used to capture images when it requires image processing and increases the le size nese are the advantages of capturing images in RAW format 1 While compressed data continues to degrade after being corrected on a computer RAW data shows almost no degradation 2 You can adjust images captured with incorrect exposure contrast etc when processing them on a comput
229. ge For the errors indicated on the PictBridge compliant device and their solution also refer to the instruction manual of the device For other troubles on the device contact the manufacturer Error Message on the PictBridge Compliant Device Printer in use No paper Paper Error Media type error Paper jam Printer cover open No print head Waste tank full Ink absorber full No ink Ink cassette error Ink Error Hardware Error Printer error lf the printer is printing from the computer or warming up wait until the job ends When it is ready the printer starts printing automatically Load paper and select Continue in the display on your PictBridge compliant device To resume printing you can also press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer instead of selecting Continue on the device Check the number of how many the Alarm lamp flashes and take the appropriate action to resolve the error Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Select Stop in the display on your PictBridge compliant device to stop printing Remove the jammed paper load new paper press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer then try printing again Close the Top Cover on the printer The Print Head is defective or is not installed See Five flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action The ink absorber is nearly full See Eight flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the ap
230. ge Setup gf Becta fi Martenance Ponter Paper Sire Later 55211 Treisi B Porinst G Trey 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast for Print Quality N Important Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is printed with settings suited for the purpose D Important f you check the Always Print with Current Settings check box all settings on the Quick Setup Main Page Setup and Effects tabs are saved and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well Click Save to register the specified settings For instructions on registering settings see Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page top Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 260 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application If the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab If you are not able to specify them with the application the procedure for selecting a page size and orientation is as follows Yo
231. ge Size Page Layout Hommaa a B H a FetoPage Scaled Page Layout Fhag Paper Fra H Leer B5111 215 2 73 4em E Background Rackoround find page ony 3 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 287 of 539 pages Background Settings Nea Saved Beckers Save settings 4 Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File Select the target image data bitmap file and then click Open 5 Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed When Custom is selected you can set coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window Intensity Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider To lighten the background move the slider to the left To darken the background move the slider to the right To print the background at the original bitmap intensity move the slider to the rightmost position 6 Save the background Click the Save settings tab and enter a new stamp title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 7 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in
232. ghts up red D Important You cannot print if the ink tank is installed in the wrong position Be sure to install the ink tank in the correct position according to the label on the Print Head Holder You cannot print unless all the ink tanks are installed Be sure to install all the ink tanks 6 Close the Top Cover Note f the Alarm lamp still flashes orange after the Top Cover is closed refer to Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide When you start printing after replacing the ink tank the printer starts cleaning the Print Head automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Print Head The Power lamp flashes green while cleaning f printed ruled lines are misaligned or the print head position is misaligned adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head O Page top Checking the Ink Status Page 55 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing an Ink Tank gt Checking the Ink Status m Checking the Ink Status You can check the ink status with the ink lamps or your computer screen With the Ink Lamps 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and open the Front Tray gently Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 2 Open the Top Cover 3 Check the ink lamps Ink lamp is on The ink tank is correctly installed and th
233. gin and then click OK DB rh M013 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin Setting the Stapling Margin Page 264 of 539 pages a Important Staple Side and Specify Margin appear grayed out and are unavailable when Borderless Poster or Booklet is selected for Page Layout Scaled is selected for Page Layout If Duplex Printing is also selected only Staple Side is selectable Page top gt Borderless Printing Page 265 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Borderless Printing Borderless Printing The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends slightly off the paper Without the borderless printing function a margin is provided around the printed data If you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it select Borderless Printing The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows Setting Borderless Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set borderless printing Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab ft Caner Pref000 I teries Printing Preferences E Chek Seve Man SB Page Setur oF etteces ff Martenance Ell Page Sye Leier 2 5711 a Orientation
234. he print direction and then print the photo Related Topics gt Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Specifying Color Correction Page 303 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed Normally the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer This method is suitable for printing SRGB data If you want to print by using the color space of sRGB or Adobe RGB data effectively select ICM If you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile select None The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set DR cock Sep GD Man E Paga Setup af Efecte fi Martenance Photo Paper Pro Il Res Trey Pita Pager Fro ff Leer 85211 215
235. he Network Setup Wizard to set up sharing When this message appears choose not to use the wizard and then set up sharing 4 Set sharing Select Share this printer Windows Vista Windows XP or Shared as Windows 2000 on the Sharing tab to set a shared name as desired and click OK a Important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue If you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning This completes the setup on the print server system Next set up the client systems O Page top Settings on Client PC Page 462 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Client PC Settings on Client PC After setting up the print server system set up the client system The procedure for setting up the client systems is as follows In Windows Vista 1 Install the printer driver on the client systems To install the driver load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the printer and select Custom Install For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the
236. he Power lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green and then open the Top Cover again e Check 2 Is the Alarm lamp flashing Close the Top Cover confirm the number of times the Alarm lamp is flashing take the appropriate action to resolve the error and then reopen it For details on how to resolve the error see Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange e Check 3 Has the Top Cover been left open for 10 minutes or longer If the Top Cover is left open for more than 10 minutes the Print Head Holder moves to the right to prevent the Print Head from drying out Close and reopen the Top Cover to return the Print Head Holder to the center e Check 4 If the printer is preparing to feed paper from the Front Tray when the Front Feed button is flashing quickly close the Top Cover and press the Front Feed button Wait until the Front Feed button stops flashing and stays lit and then open the Top Cover If the printer is preparing to feed paper from the Front Tray when the Front Feed button is flashing quickly the Print Head Holder may not move to the center In this case close the Top Cover press the Front Feed button and wait until the Front Feed button stops flashing and stays lit Reopen the Top Cover to move the Print Head Holder to the center To continue printing from the Front Tray after replacing the ink tank refer to Loading Paper and start printing again e Check 5
237. he Preferences dialog box and select the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click p Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears Face Shapira GE Diga Face Seccthing CA Uperd Wderhamebeyandgeljpy Selected 3 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking SF Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 154 of 539 pages 4 Click Red Eye Correction 5 Click OK Red eyes are corrected and the p Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image D Important Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the c
238. he Select printer port check box and click Manual selection At the Select printer port window select the connection destination and then click OK 4 Complete the installation Click Complete Turn on the printer and wait awhile until the connection is recognized This procedure installs the printer driver Depending on the environment you are using a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed To complete the installation properly restart the computer Important You can download the printer driver for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Related Topics Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver Page top Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Page 454 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Follow the procedure below to uninstall all of the installed on screen manuals from your computer Before uninstalling the on screen manuals exit all on screen manuals that are opening All of the installed on screen manuals will be deleted at the same time 1 Click Start gt All Programs Programs in Windows 2000 gt Canon XXX Manual where XXX is your printer s name gt Uninstall 2 Click OK when the confirmation message appears EA Note When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed click OK to re
239. he indication of the Front Feed button when feeding paper from the Front Tray See Loading Paper in the Front Tray Note Indication of the Front Feed button Front Feed button flashes quickly two flashes at a time The printer is ready to load paper in the Front Tray Load paper in the Front Tray properly Front Feed button flashes slowly one long flash at a time The printer is ready to feed paper from the Front Tray Start printing Front Feed button is not lit The printer is set to feed paper from the Rear Tray Front Feed button lights The printer is set to feed paper from the Front Tray m Rear View 20 13 19 13 15 Front Feed Support button Press to open the Front Feed Support 16 Front Feed Support Open it when feeding paper from the Front Tray 17 V shaped Support Open to support paper when feeding paper larger than A4 size from the Front Tray 18 Power Cord Connector Plug in the supplied power cord 19 Wheels Used to move the printer Lift up the front of the printer to move it back and forth 20 USB Port Plug in the USB cable to connect the printer with a computer a Important Do not touch the metal casing Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while printing mg Inside View Main Components 21 Ink lamp Lights or flashes red to indicate the ink tank status See Checking the Ink Status 22 Print Head Lock Lever Locks the Print Head into
240. he print job is deleted D Important m Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print job of another user EE Note a When you perform this operation all print jobs are deleted If the print queue list contained a necessary print job start the printing process over from the beginning Page top Updating the Printer Driver Page 448 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver Updating the Printer Driver Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Uninstalling the Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Page top Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Page 449 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver gt Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver By updating the printer driver to the latest version of the printer driver unresolved problems may be solved You can check the version of the printer driver by clicking the About button on the Maintenance tab Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest printer driver for your model D Important You can download the printer driver for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Before installing the latest printer driver delete the previously installed version For information on how to delete the printer driv
241. he printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before printing the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray D Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for printing the nozzle check pattern Load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it a Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box See Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 5 Print the nozzle check pattern 1 Select Test Print in the pop up menu 2 Click Nozzle Check Page 59 of 539 pages Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 60 of 539 pages ear Caress A iier iiiki etH geek j i Pores Check Bris pares hia bA pia Chek were pola Harj micra ma Oey i Bord Heed Shyri Exum pea bead gl green IT rect che mhie of gebat araj bred Cm 3 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the item
242. he quiet mode settings is as follows E ia Quiet Mode 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab The Quiet Mode dialog box opens 3 Set the silent function If necessary specify one of the following items Do not use quiet mode The operating noise of the printer is at normal volume Always use quiet mode Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer Use quiet mode within specified time The operating noise of the printer can be reduced during a specified period of time Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated D Important The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different 4 Transmit the settings Make sure that the printer is on and click Send Click OK when the confirmation message appears The selected settings are enabled hereafter Note Depending on print quality settings effects of the quiet mode may be less Page top gt Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page 383 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Printer Operation Mode Changing the Printer Operation Mode This function allows you to change the printer settings as necessary The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as follows a Custom Settings 1 Open the printer driver
243. hen using the printer driver Restrictions on the Printer Driver e With some applications the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled In this case use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software e If the selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface language the driver screen may not be displayed properly e Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties If you change any of the items you will not be able to use the following functions correctly Also if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications that prohibit EMF spooling such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor the following functions will not operate e Preview before printing on the Main tab e Prevent loss of print data in the Print Options dialog box e Page Layout Poster Booklet Duplex Printing Specify Margin Print from Last Page Collate and Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution text and lines in the preview display may appear different from the actual print result With some applications the printing is divided into multiple print jobs To cancel printing delete all divided print jobs If image data is not printed correctly display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab and cha
244. his manual It causes unexpected accident fire or electric shock Note The power supply is AC100 240V 50 60Hz via AC power supply unit K30309 Mh Warning The following are instructions that if ignored could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation Choosinga Do not place the printer close to flammable solvents such as location alcohol or thinners Power Never attempt to plug in or unplug the printer from the power supply supply when your hands are wet Always push the plug all the way into the power outlet Never damage modify stretch or excessively bend or twist the power cord Do not place heavy objects on the power cord Never plug the printer into a power socket that is shared with other equipment extension lead cord 2 or 3 way adapter etc Never use the printer if the power cord is bundled or knotted If you detect smoke unusual smells or strange noises around the printer immediately unplug the printer at the power supply and call for service Periodically unplug the printer and use a dry cloth to wipe off any dust or dirt collected on the plug and the power outlet If the printer is placed at a location exposed to a lot of dust smoke or high humidity the dust collected on the plug absorbs moisture and may cause insulation failure and fire If you hear thunder disconnect the power su
245. ht click the Canon XXX icon then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s If the setting is incorrect reinstall the printer driver or change the printer port to the correct one Page top Printing Stops Before It ls Completed Page 413 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Printing Stops Before It Is Completed e Check 1 Is the Inner Cover opened while printing on paper Close the Inner Cover and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer A page of print data being sent at the time of the error will be erased so print that page again e Check 2 Has the printer been printing continuously for a long period If the printer has been printing continuously for a long time the Print Head may overheat To protect the Print Head the printer may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing In this case interrupt your print session at a convenient time and turn the printer off for at least 15 minutes Additionally if the printer has been printing graphics or photos with intense colors continuously over a period of time the printer may stop printing to protect the Print Head In this case printing will not resume automatically Turn the printe
246. htness Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred Correct Enhance Images Window Page 171 of 539 pages Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image Move the slider to the right to soften the image Show through Removal Removes show through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color Adjust the show through level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image Move the slider to the right to increase the show through removal effect Defaults Resets each adjustment brightness contrast sharpness blur and show through removal Reset Selected Image Cancels all adjustments applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied adjustments Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied adjustments displayed in the list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Correct Enhance oS Dial Face Sahig Disnith Remover CA Uber UserName gil jeg
247. iant devices 3 Printed in 35 mm Film Style Layout Contact Printing Layout Available only with a Canon brand PictBridge compliant device May not be available with some Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices Print date Default Off No printing Date File No Both Off amp file no Image Default 1 On Exif Print Off NR Noise Reduction 2 VIVID 2 Face 2 Red Eye 2 About PictBridge Print Settings Page 357 of 539 pages optimize 1 Photos are optimized for printing using the Photo optimizer pro function 2 Can be selected only on certain Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices May not be selected depending on the device e With some types of Canon PictBridge compliant cameras you can make finer color adjustments by selecting the color mode that is most suitable for what you want to achieve Refer to the Digital Photo Printing Guide on screen manual or the instruction manual provided with your Canon PictBridge compliant device You can select the following color modes Natural Natural M B W 3 Cool tone 3 Warm tone 3 3 Depending on the image printing problems such as uneven coloration or white streaks may occur at the top and or bottom edges of the sheet when printing in grayscale In this case we recommend printing with the top and bottom margins in the print direction of the sheet set to more than 45 mm 1 77 inches using the Easy PhotoPrint Pro provided on the Setup CD ROM or your page layout software For det
248. ication Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors The notable feature of Vivid Photo is that it emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human skin color natural By using this function you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows You can also set a vivid photos in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Vivid Photo Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab Her eda D Sepa Prk Galeri Coda alj rage Opemicer ail F fhoto Optimize PRO al moc Thrghet ry ppf T F a Prato Paper Pro T Leer 8 699117 2153 en 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with vivid colors Page top gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 323 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines Smoothing Jagged Outlines The Image Optimizer function allows you to smooth jagged outlines in photos and graphics that have been enlarged with your application This feature is
249. ick paper such as art paper feed the paper from the front tray of the printer For instructions on setting up paper in the front tray see the user s manual The procedure for printing by feeding paper from the front tray is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type On the Main tab for Media Type select the media type to be loaded in the front tray Click OK when the confirmation message saying the paper source has been changed appears Then the Paper Source changes to the Front Tray Tas i Bi Oak Sep D Man E Page Sep Mada Tpos a rees 3 Select the paper source Select Front Tray from the Paper Source list on the Main tab 4 Select the paper size Click the Page Setup tab and for Page Size select the paper size that was set with the application software Front Feed Printing Page 292 of 539 pages eh Canen PreS000 I series Printing Preferences TB Ok Setup gt Man Sa Page Setup of emects A Martenance Ag A Myron dian 210 De Homsas Gordetess Hifa Scaed Page Layout G E E Storie Sde Lorgan taping Leh DAAE gt 11 5554 ony Lok cancel Note When Fine Art Photo Rag Fine Art Museum Etching Fine Art Premium Matte Other Fine Art Paper Canvas or Board Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab select Art XX Margin 35 from the Page Size list 5 Complete the setu
250. icking Select Color D Important Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable if Date Time User Name is selected e Placement tab Select the stamp position from the Position list You can also select Custom from the Position list and specify coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window To change the stamp position angle type a value in the Orientation box directly 5 Save the stamp Click the Save settings tab and enter a new stamp title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 6 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings 1 Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp Background dialog box and then select the title of the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list 2 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Saving a Stamp Setting Page 285 of 539 pages 3 Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window 4 Save the stamp Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab If you want to save the stamp with a different title tyoe a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens a
251. ide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area Printing Area To ensure the best print quality the printer allows a margin along each edge of media The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins Recommended printing area E Canon recommends that you print within this area Printable area E The area where it is possible to print However printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision Note Borderless Printing e By selecting Borderless Printing option you can make prints with no margins e When performing Borderless Printing slight cropping may occur at the edges since the printed image is enlarged to fill the whole page e For Borderless Printing use the following paper Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi Gloss SG 201 Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT 101 Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 Photo Paper Pro II PR 201 Matte Photo Paper MP 101 Performing Borderless Printing on any other type of paper may substantially reduce printing quality and or result in printouts with altered color hues Borderless Printing on plain paper may result in printouts with reduced quality Use them only for test printing You can perform Borderless Printing on plain paper only when printing from your computer e Depending on the type of paper Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality at the top and bottom edges of the paper or cau
252. ilable when A media type other than Plain Paper is selected from the Media Type list Poster is selected from the Page Layout list When Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list Duplex Printing and Staple Side appear grayed out and are unavailable Note If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing perform Bottom Plate Cleaning in the Maintenance tab Page top gt Stamp Background Printing Page 280 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing Stamp Background Printing This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data It also allows you to print date time and user name The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data The procedure for performing stamp background printing is as follows Printing a Stamp CONFIDENTIAL MPORTANT and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre registered 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab ER Cack Satop E Man SA Page Setup oof Bact fl Martenance Ell Page Spe Later 6 575001 l Rotate 120 diyeti a
253. ile 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the necessary items From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select the printing profile to be used and change the settings after Additional Features as necessary You can also set necessary items on the Main Page Setup and Effects tab 3 Click Save ane E Pra 000 D ceries Prin aaa DE Guick Setup ar SS ee Te as pee IF Paper Sawing E aaa C prevegi before printing Pinter Paper Sire Lati 8117 Onentation D Fortress Rear Trey 4 Save the settings Set Name then click OK Set the items in Options the Quick Setup tab is displayed again The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list EE Note f you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver the print settings you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings aS necessary The printing profile is saved and Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 3 9 of 539 pages Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved In this case register the print settings again Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile 1 Select the printing profile to be deleted Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab 2 Delete the printing profile Click Delete When the confirmation message appears click OK The selected printing profile is deleted from
254. ine paper as it could jam in the printer However you can use non Canon genuine art paper that is up to 53 Ib 200 gsm See Non Canon genuine specialty paper Front Tray From 4 mil 0 1 mm to 47 mil 1 2 mm Do not use paper thicker than this as it could jam in the printer O Page top Media Types You Cannot Use Page 48 of 539 pages Basic Guide Advanced Guide oubleshooting a a Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Cannot Use m Media Types You Cannot Use Do not use the following types of paper Using such paper will not only produce unsatisfactory results but can also cause the printer to jam or malfunction Folded curled or wrinkled paper Damp paper Paper that is too thin Rear Tray Less than 17 lb 64 gsm Front Tray Less than 4 mil 0 1 mm Paper that is too thick Rear Tray More than 28 lb 105 gsm plain paper except for Canon genuine paper However you can use non Canon genuine art paper that is up to 53 Ib 200 gsm See Non Canon genuine specialty paper Front Tray More than 47 mil 1 2 mm Paper thinner than a postcard including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size when printing on A5 or smaller sized paper Picture postcards Postcards affixed with photos or stickers Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive
255. ing such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos Media Types Commercially available papers Name of Paper lt Paper Source Load Limit Paper Output Settings in Printer Model No gt Rear Tray Front Tray Load Limit Driver Media Type 1 Plain Paper Approx 150 1 sheet Approx 50 sheets Plain Paper Recycled paper 3 sheets 4 Envelopes 10 envelopes Not 6 Envelope loadable Canon genuine papers Paper Source Load Limit Name of Paper Paper Output Settings in Printer lt Model No gt Rear Tray Front Load Limit Driver Media Type 4 Tray 2 For printing photos Photo Paper Pro A3 13 x 19 and 10 x 12 1 sheet 6 Photo Paper Pro Platinum 25 x 30cm 1 sheet Platinum lt PT 101 gt 7 A3 A4 Letter 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm and 8 x 10 20 x 25cm Photo Paper Pro Il 10 sheets Photo Paper Pro Il lt PR 201 gt 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 20 sheets Glossy Photo Glossy Photo Paper Paper Everyday Use lt GP 501 gt Photo Paper Glossy Photo Paper Glossy lt GP 502 gt Photo Paper Plus Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Glossy Il lt PP 201 gt Photo Paper Plus Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss Semi gloss lt SG 201 gt 4 7 Matte Photo Paper Matte Photo Paper lt MP 101 gt Fine Art Paper 1 sheet 1 sheet Fine Art Photo Rag Photo Rag lt FA PR1 gt Fine Art Paper Museum Etching FA MF1 8 Not loadable 2 Fine Art Museum E
256. ing Dates on Photos Photo Print To print the date the photo was taken on the photo click Date Settings in the Layout Print screen then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box W iFrint date Text Orientation Landscape C O Portrait Position g Bottom Right Apply to all images E Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Page top Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Page 188 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Easy PhotoPrint Ex Printing Multiple Photos on One Page You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple photo layout in the Layout Print screen K deve Pt L stof Pant Fa Bf tennt FC Bie Edt View Help Sebect the Land our lo pad Cherk thes Presna se clerk the Prak batho Preire thats AA o ae E AEE _ sia Bint ed bul Ee Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type Photos are arranged in the following order Example Borderless x4 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print ta
257. ing is checked on the Main tab you can confirm before printing whether there will be no border Page top Fit to Page Printing Page 267 of 539 pages Adyancedicmde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Fit to Page Printing Fit to Page Printing Festival j Eime ail a E The procedure for printing document which is enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set fit to page printing Select Fit to Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Laf Erect fly Martenance BB races lene a Onentation a Gi Pena A D Laeti BA Pinter Pocer Size lene Page Layout Fi4tcPage a Pais Pager Fro E Later 6 511 215 279 aom 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that was set with your application 4 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list If the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced If the printer paper size is larger than the page size the page image will be enlarged The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the printer driver Fit to Page Printing Page 268 of 539 pages Homalsire Borderless FittePage 9 Scaled Page Layout a 7 Gup
258. ing printing If you want to sharpen the print results you should intensify the colors The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed No adjustment Higher Intensity The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity on the Main tab and click Set FR asset He Page Seve of Blows i Marara Mady Tipe Fhoto Facer Pro Il Paper Source Res Trey Print Cassity Pita Pager Fro ff Leer B52 11 215 STS 4m The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust intensity Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies darkens the colors Moving the slider to the left dilutes brightens the colors You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK Adjusting Intensity Page 317 of 539 pages W ABCDEF a 1234567 D Important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifyi
259. ing to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 497 of 539 pages e Source image Adobe RGB or sRGB e Print result Image printed according to the selected lighting condition appearance difference reduced Previous Next Page top Case 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Page 498 of 539 pages al Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Case 1 J by Utilizing the Source Color Space ise 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space t retouch an image in an Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible application and print it by utilizing the Or space Adobe RGB or sRGB supported by the input ICC profile ra Advice low these steps to print images whose input ICC profile is Adobe RGB in the Adobe RGB color ice 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro 1 Open the image you want to print in an Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible application Edit retouch the image as needed memo e When printing to check the color tone of an Adobe RGB image open it in an Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible application then proceed to the next step 2 In Adobe Photoshop click File gt Automate gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Easy PhotoPrint Pro starts and the image displayed in Adobe Photoshop appears in Easy PhotoPrint Pro e In Digital Photo Professional click File gt Plug in printing gt Prin
260. int server system and each of the client systems according to the OS of each system Related Topic Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page top Settings on Print Server Page 461 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Print Server Settings on Print Server To use a printer in a network set printer sharing on the print server system The procedure for setting up the print server systems is as follows 1 Install the printer driver on the print server system For details on installation instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started 2 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers The Printers window Windows Vista Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes window Windows XP is displayed 3 Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared e In Windows Vista press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Run as administrator gt Sharing from the displayed File menu e In Windows XP or Windows 2000 select Sharing from the File menu Note Windows XP may display a message recommending the user to use t
261. inter drivers list If this happens restart your computer and try again Page top Before Installing the Printer Driver Page 452 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver gt Before Installing the Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver This section describes the items that you should check before installing the printer driver You should also refer to this section if the printer driver cannot be installed Check the Printer Status e Properly connect the personal computer and the printer For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started e Turn off the printer Check the Personal Computer Settings e Terminate all running applications e In Windows Vista log on as a user who has the administrator rights In Windows XP log on as the computer administrator In Windows 2000 log on as a member of the Administrators group Note If an old version of the printer driver is already installed first delete uninstall that version For instructions on deleting the printer driver see Uninstalling the Printer Driver Related Topics Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Page top Installing the Printer Driver Page 453 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver gt Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver You can
262. inting from Computers gt Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Case 2 Edit ch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images ase 2 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images lit retouch an sRGB image in an Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible application and print the Sulting image tu Advice yply Linear Tone to output the subtle color differences between the dark and bright parts without anging the brightness of the darkest blackest and brightest whitest parts For example by plying this effect you can print a photo of blue sky and shadows without losing the details in e shadowy parts You can also edit retouch the image and print the resulting image il Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro 1 Open the image you want to print in an Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible application Edit retouch the image as needed 2 Start Easy PhotoPrint Pro memo e To start Easy PhotoPrint Pro see the following section Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro l Opening the Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Select the image for which you want to adjust the color from the Page List area 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adjustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Setting the Color Mode 1 Click the Color Management tab 2 Select Linear Tone for Color Mode Case 2 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Page 502 of 539 pages Prides Profile ET Rendu lrter
263. is changed Dark is selected The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Fr Conan Prot E soles Pioaing Prefwencer Wady Tepe Phote Facer Pro Il Paper Source Res Try Phta Pager Fro E Leer 85211 215 Seto oe The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Specify the brightness Select Light Normal or Dark for Brightness and click OK Adjusting Brightness Page 315 of 539 pages ABCDEF j 1234567 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed at the specified brightness Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Intensity gt Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Intensity Page 316 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Intensity You can dilute brighten or intensify darken the colors of the overall image data dur
264. is feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used You can create and save a new stamp You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing stamp Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows Registering a New Stamp 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab begar E S11 7153an DRAFT T F HEG get rem Tarp first page oniy i pask pound _ Background find page oniy 3 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Saving a Stamp Setting Page 284 of 539 pages RGR 192 T37 157 Select Color ian 4 Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window e Stamp tab Select Text Bitmap or Date Time User Name for Stamp Type e For Text registration the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text Change the TrueType Font Style Size and Outline settings as necessary You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color e For Bitmap click Select File and select the bitmap file omp to be used Change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area if necessary e For Date Time User Name the creation date time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text Change the settings of TrueType Font Style Size and Outline if necessary You can select the color of the stamp by cl
265. ise cick Do not agree If you wish to uninstall the program cick Uninstal The wi uninetal the program and no further survey wil be mada Unnsal Donotagree Agree e If you agree to participate in the survey program Click Agree then follow the on screen instructions The printer usage information will be sent to Canon via the Internet If you have followed the on screen instructions the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again Note When the information is being sent a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed In this case confirm that the program name is IJPLMUI exe then allow it If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box the information will not be sent automatically from the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey To send the information automatically see Changing the confirmation screen setting e If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again three months later e To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program click Uninstall then follow the on screen instructions e
266. isplayed s MEST Error Number 1281 Is Displayed Error Number 1283 Is Displayed TIEN Error Number 1284 Is Displayed s MEE Error Number 1320 Is Displayed acintosh m Error Number 1321 Is Displayed m MEE Error Number 1700 Is Displayed p MET nk Info Number 1600 Is Displayed a MEELTE Ink Info Number 1683 Is Displayed MEET ink Info Number 1688 Is Displayed ap MES TEST Error Number 1851 Is Displayed s MEEI Error Number 1856 Is Displayed Error Number 2001 Is Displayed ap MEETS Error Number 2002 Is Displayed Error Number 2500 Is Displayed WUNI Other Error Messages LEEA The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed E MED the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Contact the service center Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed WAKKAKKN is displayed in the alphanumeric character and depends on the error occurred e 5100 or 5110 Is Displayed Confirm the movement of the Print Head Holder blocked Cancel printing from your computer
267. it immediately The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern and take an appropriate action See step 1 in Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern VVindows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray D Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for printing the nozzle check pattern Load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it D Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 5 Print the nozzle check pattern 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Nozzle Check Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern ie Coma Pah Tia Ping Prefer i na mig T me Pig gl ee a eee e e Fe Tg be Ser Ss ee rd ee n TPO a Pe ee ee H NT ae mn Cia HE rm ia Hr Lisi nanim Sa ered ba ieee ERF Sarr Fri He Agro jn kpss jm pee er seed e ere 4 lt ee oe ee r i Parna piem io ime oe br pri A Mima m la mi Fe ik mra hp api neras kie erie ima hm 3 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until t
268. it until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green Note When printing large data such as a photo or graphics it may take longer to start printing While the Power lamp is flashing green the computer is processing data and sending it to the printer Wait until printing starts e Check 2 Check the status of ink tanks Replace the ink tank if ink has run out e Check 3 Open the Top Cover and check to see if the ink lamps are flashing red If there is still sufficient ink but its ink lamp is flashing red an ink tank may not be installed in a right position m Routine Maintenance e Check 4 Open the Top Cover and make sure that the ink lamps light up red If the ink lamp is not lit press the mark on the ink tank until it clicks into place e Check 5 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer then check the followings e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the printer directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 6 Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer If there are any unnecessary print jobs delete them Deleting the Undesired Print Job e Check 7 Make sure that the Inne
269. itable for documents Media Type of the printer driver has different settings for each type of paper in advance such as using ink ejecting ink or distance from nozzles so that you can print on each paper with the optimal image quality You can print with different settings in Media Type suitable for each type of loaded paper m Use the RESUME CANCEL button to cancel printing Tip Never press the Power button If you press the Power button while printing is in progress the print data sent from the computer queues Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 85 of 539 pages in the printer and you may not be able to continue to print Press the RESUME CANCEL button to cancel printing Note f you cannot cancel printing by pressing the RESUME CANCEL button while printing from a computer open the printer driver setup window to delete the unnecessary print jobs from the printer status monitor Windows m How to maintain the optimal printing quality The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the Print Head from drying or clogging Always follow the following steps for optimal printing quality Follow the procedure below to disconnect the power plug 1 Press the Power button on the printer to turn it off 2 Make sure that the Power lamp is not lit 3 Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet or turn off the extender cable connecior If you press the Power button to turn off the power the print
270. jet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Changing the setting 2 Select Applications from the Go menu and double click the Canon Utilities folder then the Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program folder 3 Place the Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program app file into the Trash 4 Restart the computer Empty the Trash and restart your computer e Changing the setting To display the confirmation screen every time the printer usage information is sent or to resume surveying follow the procedure below 1 Select Applications from the Go menu and double click the Canon Utilities folder then the Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program folder 2 Double click the Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon Extended Survey Program Preferences General Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent The survey program is turned on Turn off o TP you wish to turn of this program click Turn off e Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent If the check box is selected the information will be sent automatically If the check box is not selected the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey Click the icon then follow the on screen instructions e Turn off Turn on button Click the Turn off button to stop the Inkjet Printer Scanner
271. job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress click Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list click Pause Printer f printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head m For Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 Note The screens used in this section are for printing with Mac OS X v 10 4 x 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Here we load A4 plain paper in the Rear Tray Note To load paper in the Front Tray see Loading Paper in the Front Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Specify the page size 1 Select Page Setup on the File menu in your software application The Page Setup dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in Format for 3 Select the page size of the loaded paper in Paper Size Here we select A4 4 Click OK Siting Pe ATi bens Printing Documents Macintosh Page 25 of 539 pages 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Select Print on the File menu in your software application The Print dialog box will appear 2 Make s
272. k White Photos are printed as if they had been taken with black and white film i fi 1 tij 1 F ia i a gt Advanced Functions for Direct Printing from Your Camera 90 tone Photos are printed in grayscale with a cool bluish tint mel VA F er F ak er a i fry 1 arm tone Photos are printed in grayscale with a warm reddish tint A i i oa r x y 4 7 j Next Page 526 of 539 pages Page top 4 Adjusting Colors before Printing Page 527 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Adjusting Colors Flexibly on a Digital Camera before Printing gt Adjusting S before Printing Adjusting Colors before Printing lect Natural M in Image Optimize Print Effect to print in the specified color a Customizing Brightness and Adjust levels slect Natural M in Image Optimize Print Effect to customize Brightness Adjust levels Face ightener and Red eye corr before printing Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the entire image by increasing reducing the midtone luminance without changing the colors of the darkest blackest and brightest whitest parts Even for a photo of blue sky and shadows you can make the shadowy parts clearer by brightening yo whitest part BAZ Brighten Standard Darken Darkest kom part TE Adjust levels Specify the darkest blackest and brightest whitest parts or det
273. k box in Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab then click Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and click Send Note If the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box is cleared printing may start without the DVD CD loaded Selecting the check box prevents the CD R Tray from getting dirty e Check 5 Is the Inner Cover opened when starting printing on paper or while printing is in progress Close Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Do not open or close the Inner Cover while printing is in progress This may damage the printer HEE Message 1001 Is Displayed e Check Place the CD R Tray properly Place the CD R Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer E is on the upper side Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 349 of 539 pages For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray EEEE Error Number 1002 Is Displayed e Check 1 Place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray properly Place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer E is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 2 Unrecognizable DVD CD may be placed Canon recommend
274. ke negative film strips To print a contact sheet select Contact Sheet for Layout in the Printer Settings window C Frie trance indo e E hells Humber of imager 35 Paper Size fol Melie Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy I E Note Contact sheets can only be printed on Letter 8 5 x11 and A4 paper Page top Printing Advanced Information Page 253 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings gt Printing Advanced Information Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Advanced Information Select the Print advanced info checkbox in the Printer Settings window to print the photo with photo information or color correction information side by side Number of imager 29 Paper Size od Media Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy I EE Note Displayed photo information items may vary depending on the application from which Easy PhotoPrint Pro is started a Click Advanced Information Settings to customize the information display print position item etc See Help for details The following combinations of layout and paper size are available for printing photo information or color correction information yon fese O Bordered full A4 Letter 8 5 x11 A3 A3 13 x19 329x483mm 11 x17 279 4x431 8mm Art A4 Margin 35 Art Letter Margin 35 Art A3 Margin 35 Art A3 13x19 Margin 35 4 x6 10x15cm
275. ke sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer 3 Click the General tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the device If a device error is displayed refer to Windows help to resolve the error EEE Error Number 92 Is Displayed e Check Is the paper size that cannot feed from the Rear Tray selected in the printer driver Click Delete Job in the dialog box that is displayed Select Quality amp Media from the pop up menu in the Print dialog box and select Front Tray from Paper Source Then load the paper in the Front Tray and try printing again B Eror Number 93 Is Displayed e Check Is the paper size that cannot feed from the Front Tray selected in the printer driver Click Delete Job in the dialog box that is displayed Select Quality amp Media from the pop up menu in the Print dialog box and select Rear Tray from Paper Source Then load the paper in the Rear Tray and try printing again EEE Error Number 300 Is Displayed e Check 1 If the Power lamp is off make sure that the power plug is plugged in then turn the printer on While the Power lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green e Check 2 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 426 of 539 pages the computer e f you are using a relay device s
276. l i ETE 8s Pape Sipe Page Layout Homsas ier 3 E J I a Lamar 85711 2153279 am homaar Bods FitofFage mt a Page Layout d 3 Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box and select a desired stamp from the list The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the stamp details If necessary complete the following settings and then click OK Stamp Background Printing Page 281 of 539 pages Place stamp over text To print the stamp on the front of the document check this check box Note The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the sections where the stamp and the document data overlap If the Place stamp over text check box is unchecked the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections depending on the application used Stamp first page only To print the stamp only on the first page check this check box Define Stamp button To change the stamp text bitmap or position click this refer to Saving a Stamp Setting 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified stamp Printing a Background 1 Select the background for which the settings are to be changed Two bitmap files are pre registered as samples 2 Click Stamp B
277. le photos 1 Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the bottom right area of the screen Note m See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 Select the Grayscale Photo checkbox in the Printer Settings window D Important When you select the Grayscale Photo checkbox all the selected images will be printed in grayscale Note You can adjust the black color tone in the Color Adjustment dialog box To display the Color Adjustment dialog box select the Grayscale Photo checkbox in the Printer Settings window and click Color Adjustment See Help for details 3 Click Print The Print dialog box appears Printing Photos in Grayscale Page 238 of 539 pages 4 Click OK D Important White streaks may appear at the top and bottom edges of grayscale photos In that case print with a 45 mm 1 77 inch or more margin at the top and bottom edges If you select Bordered Margin 45 for Layout images will be reduced when printing to allow a 45 mm 1 77 inch margin at the top and bottom edges relative to the printing direction Pigs ibe Al Keka Tyee Prous Paper iva Gh 45mm 45mm If the print result after adjusting the color balance in the Color Adjustment dialog box is different from the preview image print a color pattern and adjust the colors based on the pattern m Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns
278. leaning before you execute duplex printing Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on the printed page The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows Bottom Plate Cleaning 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens 3 Load paper in the printer As instructed in the dialog box fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half lengthwise and then unfold the sheet Load the paper into the rear tray in the landscape orientation with the crest of the crease facing down 4 Perform the bottom plate cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and click Execute Bottom plate cleaning starts Page top Changing the Printer Settings Page 3 5 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Page top Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Page 3 6 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Managing the Printer Power m Reducing the Printer Noise gt Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page top Changing the Print Options Page 377 of 539 pages Adva
279. les Printing Sasi Se 1 Ama g B Pert tom Last Page Cicala ira E or cma f e tte 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size Page top Scaled Printing Page 269 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Scaled Printing Scaled Printing eS es The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Besse a Reise 150 dipati Phea Paper Fro 1 Lener BSR V1 215 327 Loree taps Let Capes ae 1 1 953 i at z Sa F Pant dome Laa Page Pat Options Stamp Backoreund Dets 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that was set with your application 4 Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods e Select a Printer Paper Size Select a printer paper size which is different from the Page Size from the Printer Paper Size list If the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced If the printer paper size is larger than the page size the page image will be enlarged Scaled Printing Page 2 0 of 539 pages
280. lication and measuring device to display the colors that you want However this can be very costly e Print according to the lighting in the viewing environment In Windows Vista you can print using the ambient light correction function if you print from Essential Basics of Color Management Easy PhotoPrint Pro Ambient light correction is a function that reduces the differences in the way images appear depending on the place where they are viewed displayed or exhibited You can print in color tones suitable for each lighting condition Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Without ambient With ambient light correction light correction Triph osphor Fluorescent Enable ICC Profile set lamp 3000K set Under light for color evaluation Light source color high color rendering 000K Under general fluorescent lamps Light source color tiphosphor 3000K s About sRGB and Adobe RGB u Must consider color spaces when printing digital photos using color management mentioned earlier an ICC profile is required to convert translate each device dependent lor to a common color space SRGB and Adobe RGB are most often used as common color aces e diagram below shows the ranges of colors that can be represented by digital cameras tural colors the visible region printers the sRGB color space and the Adobe RGB color oO Digital cameras SYCC E Visible region Adobe RGB
281. ll photos when printing by selecting Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click T Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix Also Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application digital camera etc manufactured by other companies 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click p Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears ia T RedEye Conadi SS ee oe oo Pate PP GS Diaa Face Seccthing i IHD pa MOME Eg Calken Ure GOs deg EA Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview Ee Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 152 of 539 pages 4 Click Auto Photo Fix then click OK The enti
282. lor matching is created to uniformly manage device spendeni colors by using a common color space 1e color management system is generally used to convert each device dependent color to a mmon device independent color space represented by Lab values defined by lightness hue 1d saturation then to color spaces of other devices The color management system is built into erating systems under such names as ICM Windows and ColorSync Macintosh 1 ICC International Color Consortium profile is required to convert translate device spendent colors to a color space common to Windows and Macintosh C profiles are compatible with color spaces for devices such as monitors and printers and lor spaces for digital photo data By specifying ICC profiles correctly you can display print ors of digital photo data in a common color space 1e flow of color management performed when printing digital photos by using ICC profiles is as llows 1 Captured images are converted to Lab values for a common color space via the input profile for captured images 2 For monitors the images converted to a common color space are converted to RGB values via the monitor display profile Essential Basics of Color Management Page 475 of 539 pages 3 For printers the images converted to a common color space are converted to RGB values via the printer output profile in accordance with the printer driver s characteristics lA o i a Po a
283. loth taking care not to scratch the plate e The CD R Tray may become dirty if software other than CD LabelPrint or Easy PhotoPrint EX is used e Always use the supplied 8 cm CD R Adapter when printing on 8 cm DVD CDs e Always close the Inner Cover after printing on DVD CDs Page top Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page 339 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Attaching the CD R Tray 1 Gently press the O mark on the Front Tray to open the Front Tray A then open the Inner Cover B B Note The Inner Cover does not open when the Front Tray is set in the Front paper feeding position Return the Front Tray to the normal printing position before opening the Inner Cover 2 Place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray D Important Make sure that there is no dirt on the CD R Tray before placing a DVD CD on the CD R Tray a When placing a DVD CD on the CD R Tray do not touch the printing surface of the disc or the reflectors C on the CD R Tray a When printing on an 8 cm DVD CD attach the supplied 8 cm CD R Adapter If you do not print quality will be reduced and the disc may become damaged e 12cm DVD CD 1 Place the disc on the CD R Tray with the printable surface facing up Do not touch the reflectors C e 8cm DVD CD 1 Align the protrusions on both edge of th
284. mages Page top Cropping Photos Page 205 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Cropping Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Cropping Photos Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the necessary portions Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click image Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box Drag the portion within the white frame onto the area to crop Drag any square on the frame to resize th cropping arsa Drag the white squares on the image to change the area to be cropped and click OK Note See Help for details on cropping Page top Framing Photos Page 206 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Framing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Framing Photos You can add frames to images D Important You cannot add frames to images in Photo Print Stickers and Layout Print i i Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click re Edit Image or double click the image Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box Apok to all images in the page Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK D Important You cannot print dates on
285. mages window appears Fate hapaa Digtel Face Smacthing Cote Ug erlang gurlandiigwer seg stlecked 3 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking p Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Face Sharpener 5 Click OK Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 159 of 539 pages The face is sharpened and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener m Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Face Sharpener Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to C
286. make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for Borderless Printing If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing the print quality may be reduced at the top and bottom edges of the paper m Printing Area e Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl e For Plain Paper Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side Leaving the paper loaded on the Rear Tray for a long time may cause the paper to curl In this case load the paper with the other side facing up It may resolve the problem We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface e For Other Paper 1 With the printing side A facing up cover the paper with a fresh sheet of plain paper to avoid staining or scratching the surface 2 Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below 3 Check to see that the paper curl is within approximately 0 08 to 0 2 inches 2 to 5 mm B in height Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 405 of 539 pages We recommend printing curl corrected paper one sheet at a time Note For Paper That Curls Inward When It Is Printed Depending on the media type the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward In such cases follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward before printing This may improve the print result 1 With the printing side A facing up
287. maller the file size he compression rate also affects the image quality When the compression rate is increased oise caused by tonal variation tends to appear Many of these noises show up in landscape 10tos in which colors of similar tones such as the blue of the sky and the green of the trees are ely to occur It is recommended that you set the compression rate to low by selecting uperFine when capturing landscape images other words you can capture the highest quality images by setting the recorded pixels to the laximum and by setting the compression rate to the minimum However the file size will crease hen setting the recorded pixels image size and the compression rate it is important to be ware of the purpose of printing photos the paper size and the image quality you want Ihen printing on 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm size paper select 1600 x 1200 pixels for the best results ee the table below to set the number of recorded pixels for the paper on which you are printing ecorded Pixels Image Size amp Corresponding Paper Sizes Recorded Pixels Image Size Paper Size E Points to Check in the Digital Camera Settings Page 491 of 539 pages 3600 x 2400 approx 8 6 megapixels A3 Legal or larger 456 x 2304 approx 8 0 megapixels 072 x 2304 approx 7 0 megapixels A3 Legal 3072 x 2048 approx 6 3 megapixels 2592 x 1944 approx 5 0 megapixels 496 x 1664 approx 4 15 me
288. manual Getting Started Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation 2 Start the wizard Select the Start menu gt Network gt Add a printer The Add Printer window appears 3 Add a printer Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer and click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server a It may take some time for the icon for the printer to appear 4 Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers window This completes the setup on the client systems You can now share the printer in the network In Windows XP Windows 2000 1 Install the printer driver on the client systems To install the driver load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the printer and select Custom Install For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation 2 Start the wizard e In
289. mation will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again Saving EE Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 148 of 539 pages Advancediamide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Printing Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears i i t Lien Prank TER Bie Edt View Help Pring ieee in Te STD ET Layout Print Chex the Pring button to pring with the current settings Prinking shart ee qs oe 7 E Paper gia E lgm Pagar ppupa Rear Tray s Meda Typo Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il angete D i Saree os nlg Paws oy i l mio rm i pea eee DURES Pinang Quality Spin F Dordariess Prening 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EE Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that
290. ms Programs in Windows 2000 Canon Utilities Easy PhotoPrint EX then Easy PhotoPrint EX To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu click a Solution Menu in the Dock and click Print photos or albums etc See To Start Solution Menu 2 Click Photo Print Note You can select Album Calendar Stickers etc besides Photo Print See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX come in a ra 7 i i E i Alam Sn i a i Hy L ie 3 lami Ah like i se 3 Select a photo to print 1 Select the folder in which images are saved 2 Click the image to print The number of copies appears as 1 and the image you selected appears in the selected image area A You can select two or more images at the same time Note To print two or more copies click Up arrow to change the number of copies To cancel the selection click the image to cancel in the selected image area and click Delete Imported Image You can also use Down arrow to change the number of copies to zero You can also correct or enhance the selected image See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX 3 Click Select Paper Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 14 of 539 pages 4 Select the loaded paper 1 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in Printer 2 Select Rear Tray in Paper Source Note To feed paper from the Front Tray select Front Tray in Paper S
291. n To display the Preferences dialog box click Be Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page top Printing Photo Information Page 192 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Photo Information Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photo Information Select Captured Info from the layouts in the Layout Print screen to print the photo and the Exif information side by side Select the laand jaa ware bin pint Check the Prevaee sred clkck the Prink button Previrey thats Jpg agmg A Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8 5 x11 and A4 Page top Saving Photos Page 193 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Saving Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX S Saving Photos You can save edited photos The information of cropping and layout can be saved Click Save in the Layout Print screen ET Check the Pressa Seed kek the Print bii Predrag charts HSA lels When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save D Important f you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten
292. n Manual Print Head Alignment Checking the Print Head Nozzles m Cleaning Inside the Printer Page top Cleaning the Print Heads Page 364 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Print Heads The print head cleaning function allows you to remove any blockages in the print head nozzles Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print even though there is enough ink The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows Cleaning 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning 3 Execute cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute Print head cleaning starts 4 Complete cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem clean it once more Deep Cleaning Deep Cleaning is more thorough than Cleaning Perform deep cleaning when two cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem 1 Open the
293. n example For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Note Operations may vary depending on your software application For details on the operation refer to the instruction manual of your application The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows Vista operating system Ultimate Edition hereafter referred to as Windows Vista When printing in grayscale depending on an image the printing troubles may occur on the top and or bottom edges of the paper such as uneven coloration or white streaks In this case we recommend printing on paper with top and bottom margins of 1 77 inches 45 mm or more according to the direction of printing using Easy PhotoPrint Pro provided on the Setup CD ROM or your page layout software application When using a page layout software application or the like prepare paper whose longer side is at least 3 54 inches 90 mm longer than the length of the image then print it with top and bottom margins of 1 77 inches 45 mm or more according to the direction of printing For details on grayscale printing refer to the on screen manual Digital Photo Printing Guide 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Here we load A4 plain paper in the Rear Tray Note To load paper in the Front Tray see Loading Paper in the Front Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension
294. n the photo printing process once films have been developed With digital photo data you do Printing Photos from Digital Photo Data Page 472 of 539 pages not need to have it adjusted corrected by anyone else since you can edit it yourself on a compuier other words by using a digital camera you can check and complete all processes from taking e picture to printing it and you can convert a picture in your mind into reality as you wish This is ne of the major reasons for the popularity of digital cameras a Points to Check when Printing Photos from Digital Photo Data igital photo data is only transformed into works of art after you edit modify it yourself and print it Vhen you print digital camera photos from a printer are the colors really what you wanted omplaints about colors such as The printed colors are different from the colors on the images iken and The printed colors do not match the colors on the monitor can sometimes be heard way of handling color management for printing could be behind such complaints olor management ICC profile and other factors that are unnecessary for silver salt film ameras can be keywords for taking all the way through to printing digital photos his Digital Photo Printing Guide explains the procedures for using applications as well as ords and the basics of color management that are essential for maximizing your printer s erformance and for creatin
295. n the CD R tray check box and click Send acintosh e Clear the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box in Custom Settings on the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box then click Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and click Send Note i If you left cleared Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and start printing another DVD CD printing may start without the DVD CD loaded Selecting the check box prevents the CD R Tray from getting dirty Cannot Print on DVD CDs Page 351 of 539 pages CD R Tray Jammed Pull out the CD R Tray gently If the CD R Tray cannot be pulled out turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on again The CD R Tray will automatically be ejected When the CD R Tray is pulled out place the CD R Tray again with an E on the upper side and retry printing Place the DVD CD properly Attaching Removing the CD R Tray If the CD R Tray is still jammed check if there is a problem with the DVD CD CD R Tray Does Not Feed Properly Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 352 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 353 of 539 pages Adv
296. n your application software m Printing Area Check 8 Is the Paper Feed Roller dirty Clean the Paper Feed Roller Routine Maintenance Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary Check 9 Is inside of the printer dirty When performing duplex printing the inside of the printer may become stained with ink causing the printout to become smudged Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the printer Cleaning Inside the Printer Note To prevent the inside of the printer from stains set the paper size correctly Check 10 Set Ink Drying Wait Time longer Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Open the printer properties dialog box m Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 407 of 539 pages 3 Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click Send 5 Confirm the message and click OK 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 3 Select Custom Settings in the pop up menu 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click Send 5 Confirm the message and
297. nced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Print Options Changing the Print Options You change detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off The procedure for changing the print options is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Print Options on the Page Setup tab Fhag Pager Fro E begs 8 511 215a Da he cooler poii ating of the appbeatiors softens o Ei De the paper source setting of the appication software Lind of Port Date Proceeeng Recommended l ok cca Ots pe 3 Change the individual settings If necessary change the setting of each item and then click OK The Page Setup tab is displayed again Page top Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 378 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows Registering a Printing Prof
298. nced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Cautions When Printing on DVD CDs Cautions When Printing on DVD CDs e Be sure to use the CD R Tray supplied with this printer It has an E on the upper side e Do not print on DVD CDs that are not compatible with ink jet printing The ink will not dry and may cause problems with the disc itself or devices which the disc is loaded onto e Do not print on the DVD CDs recording surface Doing so will make data recorded on DVD CDs unreadable e Hold DVD CDs by their edges Do not touch either the label surface printing surface or recording surface e Remove any dirt from the CD R Tray before placing DVD CDs on the CD R Tray Loading discs in a dirty CD R Tray may scratch the recording surface of the discs e After printing allow the printing surface of the disc to dry naturally Do not use hairdryers or expose the disc to direct sunlight to dry the ink Do not touch the printing surface until the ink has dried e Do not attach the CD R Tray while the printer is in operation e Do not remove the CD R Tray while printing on DVD CDs Doing so may damage the printer the CD R Tray or the disc e Do not get dirt or scratches on the reflectors of the CD R Tray The printer may not be able to recognize loading of the DVD CD or printing may become misaligned If the reflectors on the CD R Tray become dirty wipe the reflector clean with a soft dry c
299. ncorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation Choosing a location Power supply Working around the printer Do not install the printer in a location that is unstable or subject to excessive vibration Do not install the printer in locations that are very humid or dusty in direct sunlight outdoors or close to a heating source To avoid the risk of fire or electric shocks install the printer in a location with an ambient temperature range of 5 C to 35 C 41 F to 95 F and humidity of 10 to 90 condensation free Do not place the printer on a thick rug or carpet Do not place the printer with its back attached to the wall Ensure that the area around the power outlet is kept clear at all times so you can easily unplug the power cord if necessary A Never remove the plug by pulling on A gt the cord Do not use an extension lead cord Never put your hands or fingers in the printer while it is printing When moving the printer carry the printer at both ends Do not place any object on the printer Do not place metal objects paper clips staples etc or containers of flammable solvents alcohol thinners etc on top of the printer If any foreign object metal or liquid fall into the printer unplug the power cord and call for service Safety Precautions Print Heads and ink tanks Page 5 of 539 pages Do not transport or use the printer on a slant
300. ng Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Contrast Page 318 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct increase the contrast On the other hand to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images smaller and less distinct reduce the contrast No adjustment Adjust the contrast The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Phote Paper Fro ll Leer 85 11 215 S279 am The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust the contrast Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast and moving it to the left decreases the contrast You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK Adjusting Contrast Page 319 of 539
301. ng by Utilizing the Source Color Space When you want to print edited retouched images by specifying a profile Printing from Other Applications Printing by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application specifying an ICC Profile in the Driver Printing from Other Applications Page 488 of 539 pages Application Printer driver settings Want to edit retouch an sRGB image and print the resulting image Want to print by utilizing the source color space Adobe RGB or sRGB Ayvailable even if application does not support Adobe RGB Matching tab Color Correction Driver Matching Color Mode Standard Matching tab Color Correction Driver Matching Color Mode Linear Tone Matching tab Color Correction CM Input Profile Adobe RGB 1999 or Standard sRGB cE ie ig ie Print Option Adjust Color Balance Brightness Intensity and Contrast for prints etailed Operations os When you want to print by utilizing the color space of the source ICC profile Adobe RGB or SRGB Printing from Other Applications Printing from Applications in which ICC Profiles Cannot be Set mam When you want to edit retouch sRGB images and print the resulting images Printing from Other Applications Page 489 of 539 pages Printing from Other Applications Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images When you want to print SRGB images in popular color tones using
302. nge the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software This may solve the problem Software windows may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when fonts are set to Larger scale If you want to display the windows with Larger scale fonts set the desktop theme to Windows Classic as follows 1 Select Control Panel from the Start menu 2 Select Appearance and Personalization gt Personalization gt Theme The Theme Settings dialog box opens 3 At the Theme Settings dialog box click the Themes tab and select Windows Classic from Theme 4 Click OK Desktop changes to Windows Classic display Points to Note with Applications e There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word Microsoft Corporation e f Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver use Word to specify them e When selecting Scaled Fit to Page or Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab the selected printing function may not be effective depending on the version of Word If this happens follow the procedure below 1 Open Word s Print dialog box 2 Open the printer driver setup window specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab and click OK Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 437 of 539 pages 3 Without starting printing close the Print dialog box 4 Open Word s Print dialog box again 5 Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK 6 Start printing e llustrator A
303. not set to its correct position The Front Tray was moved during printing Eleven flashes Automatic Print Head alignment failed The Page Size setting does not match the size of the paper loaded in the printer Page 389 of 539 pages Follow the directions given in your setup manual to install the Print Head If the Print Head is already installed remove the Print Head once and then reinstall it If the error is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center If the Inner Cover is open when starting printing on paper close the Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer e Some ink tanks are not installed in the correct position The lamps on the ink tanks flash e More than one ink tanks of the same color are installed The lamps on the ink tanks flash Confirm that the ink tanks are installed in the appropriate positions Routine Maintenance The ink absorber is almost full Press the printer s RESUME CANCEL button to continue printing Contact the service center e Check the device connected to the printer Printing photos directly is possible only with a PictBridge compliant device e Acommunication time out occurs if an operation takes too long or if it takes too much time to send data This may cancel printing In such cases disconnect and reconnect the USB cable When printing from a PictBridge compliant device depending on the model or brand of your devic
304. nstructions given in the device s instruction manual 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Load paper e When printing on paper other than 14 x 17 355 6 x 431 8 mm Load paper in the Rear Tray Refer to Loading paper e When printing on 14 x 17 355 6 x 431 8 mm paper Load paper in the Front Tray Refer to Loading paper 3 Make sure that the PictBridge compliant device is turned off 4 Connect the PictBridge compliant device to the printer using a USB cable A recommended by the device s manufacturer The PictBridge compliant device turns on automatically If your device does not turn on automatically turn it on manually a i will appear on the LCD of the device when the printer is correctly connected Wi Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 355 of 539 pages 5 Specify the print settings such as the paper type and layout You can perform settings using the menu on the LCD of your PictBridge compliant device Select the size and type of paper that you loaded in the printer Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device 6 Start printing from your PictBridge compliant device D Important Never disconnect the USB cable during printing unless when explicitly allowed to by the PictBridge compliant device When disconnecting the USB cable between the PictBridge compliant device and printer follow the instructions given in the device s instruction manual Page top gt
305. nt The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Preferences or Properties The Print Settings screen of the printer driver appears Microsoft APS Document Writer Status Ready Comment Page Range All Number of copies 1 E Selection Curent Page Pages _ Collste Case 5 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Page 522 of 539 pages 3 Opening the Manual Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Select the Main tab 2 Set the Media Type and Print Quality 3 Click Manual for Color Intensity Mada Tipa Phata Pape Pht sssr ll Papar See Pict Chualty ORA Fag Photo Paper Fius Gloesy I Latter 28117 215 Se Sn 4 Click Set to the right of Manual The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box appears 4 Setting the Color Correction and Color Mode 1 Select the Matching tab 2 Select Driver Matching for Color Correction 3 Select Standard for Color Mode 4 Click OK Case 5 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Page 523 of 539 pages Printing Click Print f MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Page top Adjusting Colors Flexibly on a Digital Camera before Printing Page 524 of 539 pages al Photo Printing Guide Canon hoto Printing Guide gt Adjusting Colors Flexibly on a Digital Camera before Printing justing Colors
306. nt quality The numbers correspond to the numbers on the print quality slider in the Set Print Quality dialog box opened from the Print Quality tab of the driver The lower the number the finer the quality For printer settings see the following section Printing from Other Applications Printing by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application Points to Check in the Application Settings Page 495 of 539 pages f MEMO e Editing sRGB Images in Adobe RGB Color Space Follow these steps to edit retouch an sRGB image in the Adobe RGB color space You can edit retouch in the Adobe RGB color space while preserving SRGB data colors 1 Set the working space to Adobe RGB Select Color Settings from the Edit menu then set Working Spaces to Adobe RGB 2 In the Assign Profile window set the profile to SRGB Select Assign Profile from the Edit menu then set Profile to sRGB 3 In the Convert to Profile window set to convert to Adobe RGB Select Convert to Profile from the Edit menu then set Profile under Destination Space to Adobe RGB Note If a profile mismatch error appears when opening a new SRGB image after step 1 select Convert document s colors to the working space Previous Next Page top Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 496 of 539 pages ital Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Easy PhotoPrin
307. nts to Check in the Application Settings ra S Check5 Check the printing procedure it settings should be configured according to your application and depending on the purpose rinting such as I want to print utilizing the color space of the digital photo Follow the links ow to learn about the print settings for your application and that best meet your requirements a Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing from Other Applications Next Page top Essential Basics of Color Management Page 474 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printer based Digital Photo Printing gt Essential Basics of Color gement Essential Basics of Color Management lis section explains the basics of color management that will help you maximize your printer s formance and create rewarding work of art in photographic form a What is Color Management t s look at the processes involved in printing digital camera photos 1 Capture images with a digital camera 2 Check the image you want to print and its colors on a computer monitor 3 Print it from a printer olors captured with a digital camera colors that can be displayed on a monitor and colors that in be printed using a printer cannot be reproduced in the same colors when displayed printed other devices due to differences between color spaces supported by each device 1e color management system co
308. num Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss Glossy Photo Paper Matte Photo Paper Ink Jet Hagaki Hagaki Other Photo Paper When Borderless is selected the Printer Paper Size Staple Side settings and the Stamp Background button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out and are unavailable Print quality may deteriorate or the sheet may be stained at the top and bottom depending on the type of the media used When the ratio of the height to the width differs greatly from the image data a portion of the image may not be printed depending on the size of the media used In this case crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size Expanding the Range of the Document to Print Specifying a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems However the portion of the document that extends off the paper range will not be printed Subjects around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed Try borderless printing once If you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing reduce the amount of extension The extension amount becomes shorter as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left D Important If the amount of extension is shortened an unexpected margin may be produced on the print depending on the size of the paper Note If the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position image data will be printed in the full size If Preview before print
309. o Professional to printing Operation varies depending on the purpose Check the operational flow in the following diagram Import an image captured with a digital camera into Adobe Photoshop or Digital Photo Professional image captured in Adobe RGB mode Image captured with an ordinary digital Image in Adobe RGB color space Camera Image in sSRGE color space Editretouch image with Adobe Photoshop or Digital Photo Professional Print sRGB image using Canon Digital Photo Color Print edited retouched sRGB image in the edilted retouched state Print an Adobe RGB or sRGB image by utilizing its onginal color Print image by utilizing its onginal color space space i T Print by setting the color mode to Linear Tone See the following section for details ral Print by setting the color mode to Photo Color See the following section for details Print using an ICC profile See the following section for details Operations with Adobe Photoshop or Digital Photo Professional Operations with Easy PhotoPrint Pro Detailed Operations Printing an Adobe RGB or sRGB image by utilizing its original color space td Printing an image by utilizing its original color space Printing with ICC Profiles Adobe RGB sRGB Printing an edited retouched sRGB image in the edited retouched state gt Printing Edited Retouched sRGB Images Printing Be
310. o Use This Manual Printing This Manual Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Printing an Envelope Front Feed Printing Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Adjusting Tone Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise XPS Printer Driver Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Managing the Printer Power Reducing the Printer Noise Changing the Printer Operation Mode Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleanin
311. o for descriptions of Easy PhotoPrint Pro screens Click Help in a dialog box or select Help Topics from the Help menu Help appears In Windows Vista using the XPS printer driver enables you to print in the High Dynamic Range full 16 bit workflow See XPS Printer Driver for details on the XPS printer driver Supported Data Formats e One color 8 or 16 bits per pixel RGB data formats supported by Adobe Photoshop e One color 8 or 16 bits per pixel RGB data formats supported by Digital Photo Professional What Is Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 218 of 539 pages General Note e The color tone of the image displayed on the display monitor is different from the print result Page top Printing Beautiful Photos Page 219 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Beautiful Photos Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Beautiful Photos Easy PhotoPrint Pro allows you to print images captured in Adobe RGB or sRGB mode in colors that are close to their original colors by using ICC profiles You can also print with Canon s unique color tones Canon Digital Photo Color or print edited retouched sRGB images in the edited retouched state By applying the suitable printing method you can produce photos that meet your expectations The diagram below shows the flow of digital imaging from importing captured photo into Adobe Photoshop or Digital Phot
312. ob in progress press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor To display the printer status monitor click Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name on the taskbar f printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head O Page top Page 21 of 539 pages Printing Documents Macintosh Page 22 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing Photos Documents gt Printing Documents Macintosh Printing Documents Macintosh This section describes the procedure using the settings to print a document of A4 size on plain paper as an example For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Note Operations may vary depending on your software application For details on the operation refer to the instruction manual of your application When printing in grayscale depending on an image the printing troubles may occur on the top and or bottom edges of the paper such as uneven coloration or white streaks In this case we recommend printing on paper with top and bottom margins of 1 77 inches 45 mm or more according to the direction of printing using Easy PhotoPrint Pro provided on the Setup CD ROM or your page layout software application When using a page layout software application or the like prepare paper whose longer side is at least 3 54 inches 90 mm l
313. of Photo Printing Photos in Grayscale Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Adjusting Brightness Contrast Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings Printing Borderless Photos Printing an Index Printing Contact Sheets Printing Advanced Information Trimming Photos Printing with Adjusted Print Size Saving Print Settings Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Saving a Stamp Setting Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background Printing an Envelope Front Feed Printing Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Adjusting Tone Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Pro9000 Mark II s
314. of all titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 2 Click Start Printing The Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed 3 Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All topics are printed D Important A large amount of paper is necessary to print all topics Before printing be sure to check the number of print pages displayed in the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box The Print Preview dialog box allows you to scale the printing to the paper width or to set the zoom rate However if the print data extends outside the paper because of the new zoom rate that portion of the document will not be printed on the paper Page top Using Keywords to Find a Topic Page 99 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Using Keywords to Find a Topic Using Keywords to Find a Topic You can enter a keyword to search for a target page All installed on screen manuals user s guides are searched E Cance 0 a 8 eriei Ortereen Manual ack pw Dy Contents oe My Manuail searen Print E mA L EEEE R Canon Howte Wise This Mawa gt Printing This Manual in What b Ean rea Pa 2 Pentre wath Em haa P O Seting Esr F hao Pert Pro 2 Prnting Does Hot Stai D Paper dama I Pariis hezk r the Agee b Ci Cata 1 Parting by isng the
315. of the Hi Speed USB driver compatible with your hardware and reinstall it on your computer w Important For details on Hi Speed USB of your system environment contact the manufacturer of your computer USB cable or USB hub Page top Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 397 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory Print Results Not Satisfactory If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks misaligned lines or uneven colors confirm the paper and print quality settings first e Check 1 Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded paper When these settings are incorrect you cannot obtain a proper print result If you are printing a photograph or an illustration incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the printout color Also if you print with an incorrect paper type setting the printed surface may be scratched In borderless printing uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and the loaded paper The method of confirming the paper and print quality settings differs depending on what you do with your printer To print from a PictBridge compliant Confirm by using your PictBridge compliant device device m Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device To print from a computer Confirm by using the printer driver Printing with Easy Set
316. om a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones you must select a printing method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose Color Management Devices such as digital cameras scanners monitors and printers handle color differently Color management color matching is a method that manages device dependent colors as a common color space For Windows a color management system called ICM is built into the operating system Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces Adobe RGB has a wider color space than sRGB ICC profiles convert device dependent colors into a common color space By using an ICC profile and carrying out color management you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color reproduction area that the printer can express Note Normally image files are saved in JPEG format Some digital cameras allow you to save images in a format called RAW RAW data refers to an image saving format that requires a computer to develop the image You can
317. on software that allows you to edit and modify data before printing Install it on your computer to use it For information on how to install this software refer to your setup manual e For details on how to print with CD LabelPrint refer to its manual If you are using a Windows computer click Start gt All Programs or Programs in Windows 2000 gt CD LabelPrint gt Manual If you are using a Macintosh open the Applications folder in the location where the MP Drivers have been installed gt CD LabelPrint folder gt Manual folder gt double click Manual htm oP eee eee f w e pi m ha me Denn jha fee La w tela AA BO OAs Prat Jans ck ce ee LAGD mi EL i CT Page top Printing Area Page 346 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Printing Area Printing Area Printable DVD CDs The printing area of both printable DVDs and CDs is the area excluding the 1 mm area from the internal and external diameters of the label 1 0 mm 1 0 mm E Recommended printing area Page top Troubleshooting Page 347 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Message Appears on the Computer Screen Cannot Print on DVD CDs Page top Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 348 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt P
318. on the printer and try printing again Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to return the Front Tray to its normal printing position Do not move the Front Tray during printing WETTE Error Number 1320 Is Displayed e Check Is the printer ready to feed paper from the Front Tray Load the paper correctly in the Front Tray and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to load the paper correctly in the Front Tray Error Number 1321 Is Displayed e Check Is the paper loaded correctly in the Front Tray Press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to clear the error and then load the paper correctly in the Front Tray according to the procedure described in Loading Paper and try printing again WEE TEED Error Number 1700 Is Displayed e See Eight flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 427 of 539 pages Ank Info Number 1600 Is Displayed e See Four flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action MESTE ink Info Number 1683 Is Displayed e See Thirteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action EE nk Info Number 1688 Is Displayed e See Sixteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action EERE Error Number 1851 Is Displayed e Check Close the Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL
319. on when you have trouble with the operation My Printer is not available in Macintosh To Start Solution Menu Double click Solution Menu on the desktop Click Here Solution Menu Click Solution Menu in the Dock The screens below are for Windows Vista ieee akimi Vivi Bi W Pm TEYE ta Ce p P G Ln Ee i o is n hn bt o Lor d imm im le h m a Click the button of a function to use te After starting Solution Menu click the button on the title bar to reduce the window size Care Sutin Mani Eps SRERWASS Note Install Solution Menu from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install Solution Menu select Solution Menu in Custom Install The buttons displayed on the screen may vary depending on the country or region of purchase To start Solution Menu from the Start menu select All Programs Programs in Windows 2000 Canon Utilities Solution Menu then Solution Menu To start Solution Menu from the menu bar select the Go menu Applications Canon Utilities Solution Menu then double click Solution Menu To Start My Printer F Vindows Double click My Printer on the desktop Solution Menu and My Printer Page 30 of 539 pages ret ad Fl ee E a a A hers a iE hir Me m afi le pees pe se oe Note You can also start My Printer from Solution Menu Install My Printer from the Setup CD ROM when it ha
320. onger than the length of the image then print it with top and bottom margins of 1 77 inches 45 mm or more according to the direction of printing For details on grayscale printing refer to the on screen manual Digital Photo Printing Guide m For Mac OS X v 10 5 x 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Here we load A4 plain paper in the Rear Tray Note To load paper in the Front Tray see Loading Paper in the Front Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Open the Print dialog box Select Print on the File menu in your software application The Print dialog box will appear Note If the dialog box below appears click Down arrow Pine Cann Prk ll nerian gO meam Harndird H O Eme Pew Came ee Printing Documents Macintosh 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in Printer 2 Select the page size of the loaded paper in Paper Size Here we select A4 3 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu Rite Canon Prose amia AANE See Peat Shanda a Comes eoma as Pages feb All i Erme 1 or l ie E oS Crisana ii Te fe Ga ae Pirri hacker ard foot Cama Geel
321. only if Album has been selected When Single color is Selected Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK Changing Background Page 199 of 539 pages Change Background Background Type Select from samples Image file No background Background Color Standard color a Custom color Customize Apply to all pages Cancel Help When Image file is Selected Set Image File Path and Image Layout then click OK Changing Background Page 200 of 539 pages Change Background xl Background Type CO Select from samples C Single color Image file C No background Image File Fath a 3 C Users Userl amesiIMGO0S2_s jpg meas Browse Semitransparent 10 Image Layout Crop to fit page 0 Auto scale to fit page D Tile C Original size Apply to all pages Note See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box Page top Adding Photos Page 201 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Adding Photos Adding Photos You can add images to pages Select the page you want to add photos in the Edit screen then click Add Image E Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create aa MGO00O sio9
322. ons refer to the manual of the application software you are using 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab mi Canen Pop 0 series Printing Preferences Phas Paper Fra E bars 2211 215a 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast for Print Quality D Important Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Printing with ICC Profiles Page 309 of 539 pages Click Matching tab and select None for Color Correction 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer uses the color space of the image data Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver and then Print When you print from an application software that cannot identity input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one the printer prints using the color space of the input ICC profile found in the data When printing Adobe RGB data you can print the data with the Adobe RGB color
323. ons that apply if you are using a printer in a network environment Check the restrictions for the environment you are using If you are sharing a printer in a network e A print completion message may be displayed To disable the message display follow the procedure below e In Windows Vista Press the Alt key from the Printers window on the client system Open Run as administrator gt Server Properties from the displayed File menu Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e In Windows XP or Windows 2000 Open Server Properties from the File menu of the Printer and Faxes window Windows XP or the Printers window Windows 2000 on the print server system Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e The bi directional communication function is disabled so that the correct printer status may not be recognized If a client user opens the printer driver properties and then clicks OK with the Enable bidirectional support check box on the Ports tab unchecked the bi directional function of the printer server system may also be disabled In this case check Enable bidirectional support check box on both the print server system and the client system e When you print from a client system you cannot use Canon lJ Preview e lf the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client syst
324. or Adobe Photoshop and Digital Photo Professional an application for Canon digital single lens reflex cameras Easy PhotoPrint Pro allows you to print photos easily in various styles including borderless full page index grayscale and Adobe RGB mode Humber of imager d Peper Size Ad Medis Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy I iPega N Important Easy PhotoPrint Pro supports Adobe Photoshop CS Photoshop CS2 Photoshop CS3 and Photoshop Elements 6 and Digital Photo Professional Ver 2 1 or later only For updated compatibility visit our website Easy PhotoPrint Pro does not support Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT4 fa printer that supports Easy PhotoPrint Pro is not installed you cannot start Easy PhotoPrint Pro Although compatibility with Windows Vista and Windows XP has been confirmed Easy PhotoPrint Pro does not support the Fast User Switching feature of Windows Vista and Windows XP It is recommended that you exit Easy PhotoPrint Pro before using Fast User Switching If Adobe Photoshop is installed after installing Easy PhotoPrint Pro you cannot start Easy PhotoPrint Pro as it does not appear in Adobe Photoshop s menu In that case follow these steps to install the Photoshop Plug In 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Photoshop Plug In Installer 2 Follow the on screen instructions to install Ee Note See Help of Easy PhotoPrint Pr
325. or Tones Case 4 Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Printing from Other Applications Case 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Case 2 Printing by Specifying an ICC Profile within the Application Case 3 Printing from Applications in which ICC Profiles Cannot be Set Case 4 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Case 5 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Page top Overview of Printing from Computers Page 480 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Overview of Printing from Computers Overview of Printing from p yg Computers lis section explains the operational flows of printing from computers Follow the procedure ised on your application image type and how you want to print am Which application do you want to print from gital photo printing settings operations vary for each application Select a type of application slow and follow the procedure shown Print from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Check this flow when you want to print digital camera photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro an application supplied with this printer after opening then editing retouching them in Adobe Photoshop CS Adobe Photoshop CS2 Adobe Photoshop CS3 Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or Digital Photo Professional You can easily print using the color management system when printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro via Adob
326. or entering a print head alignment value is displayed Manual Print Head Alignment Page 371 of 539 pages D Important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress EA Note Clicking Print Alignment Value prints the current settings and finishes Print Head Alignment 5 Look at the first printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column A that has the least noticeable vertical streaks a P in _ os a i I a i A i a i i i P a a Lt Lil i a ia ia r i T t ki a 1 Fr i a E r D pr t L i A z pari L La i Lr amp i Pe T T i i 3 a ui UA EE i a 1m a ke E le I 1 i ial al i 1 i LA l Ca EE Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks B A Less noticeable vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column H then click Send EA Note If itis difficult to pick the best pattern in column H pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks me Manual Print Head Alignment Page 372 of 539 pages C Less noticeable vertical white streaks D More noticeable vertical white streaks 3 Confirm the dis
327. ords that were entered 4 Display the topic that you want to read From the search results list double click or select and press Enter the title of the topic you want to read When the pages of that title are displayed the keywords found on those pages are highlighted Page top Registering Topics to My Manual Page 101 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Registering Topics to My Manual Registering Topics to My Manual Register frequently read pages as My Manual topics so that you can refer to those pages easily at any time re ee 4 Canon gt Howto Wee This Maral F Printing This Manual gr Basle Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Desoibes the summary of this Descibes fie detailed unggon ana Ma of this product 1 Display the topic Display the topic to be added to My Manual 2 Click My Manual The My Manual pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual Note Click to close or display the My Manual pane 3 Register the topic to My Manual Click Add The currently displayed topic is added to List of My Manual Note Alternatively from the Recently Displayed Documents list double click or select and press Enter the topic to be added to My Manual to display that topic and then click Add 4 Display My Manual When you double click or select and
328. orrection to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Red Eye Correction Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to ks Paintbrush Conect Enhance Te Red Eye Conpctert I 2 amp Wik mf Sheng Surround a fed area lo specs the are pi ean bo conec es Fece Dirigkd ener poe Face SP ered o hel Ds Face Scot Bhenith Remove ED Binih Removes 5 Drag to select the red area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Red eye is corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red Eye Correction Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 155 of 539 pages 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit D Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Face Brightener Function Page 156 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Appli
329. oto Color for Color Mode Comedie Color Manegement Cole Modo Prete Coker Previa Profi Auto T Render lriert Ralsin Ciera 3 Click OK Case 3 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Page 504 of 539 pages a Printing 1 Set the Paper Size Media Type and Layout 2 Click Print f MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top Case 4 Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Page 505 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Case 4 1g According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment ase 4 Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Windows Vista you can print using the ambient light correction function if you print from Easy 1otoPrint Pro 4 Advice nbient light correction is a function that reduces the differences in the way images appear pending on the place where they are viewed displayed or exhibited You can print in color nes suitable for each lighting condition is recommended that you print an image with different ambient light correction settings to find e color tone suitable for the place where it is viewed displayed or exhibited Color appearance examples Essential Basics of Color Man
330. otoPrint EX Help from the Help menu Help appears About Exif Print Easy PhotoPrint EX supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications Easy PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications See the application s manual for details on the procedure for starting The Photo Print function is available with the following applications What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 107 of 539 pages e MP Navigator EX Ver 1 00 or later e ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 0 or later e Digital Photo Professional Ver 3 2 or later N Important Easy PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo Professional Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen Images cannot be corrected enhanced Image display order cannot be changed Edited images cannot be saved Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Therefore you cannot use the Vivid Photo and Photo Noise Reduction functions The Album function is available with the following applications e MP Navigator EX Ver 1 00 or later e ZoomBrowser EX Ver 5 8 or
331. otoPrint Pro gt Printing Beautiful Photos Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro Adjust the Colors of Photo Easy PhotoPrint Pro Settings Page top gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 106 of 539 pages dvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily Sto PreaPi file Edit View Help Select tha Kam yaa want Te cragta from the many Salact Loner te ances gaved Remi N Important Easy PhotoPrint EX does not support Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT4 Easy PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers It does not support some printers including Canon compact printers SELPHY CP series f a printer that supports Easy PhotoPrint EX is not installed you cannot print items you create f Easy PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy LayoutPrint installed Easy LayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy PhotoPrint EX Note Printing on paper larger than A4 is available with supported printers only See your printer manual for details See Help of Easy PhotoPrint EX for descriptions of Easy PhotoPrint EX screens Click Help in a screen or dialog box or select Easy Ph
332. ottom of the soraan to spert brout and backgroud Afg SHE Y Pasa poe gbr pegad fo fhe gaaet Images sergan Gener Settee Paper Sie Ad Fl oubik pace abum Qnentation potat AO Landscape Mirage number Cover Fron amp Back E Ostend Same Layout Thame Seok Front Garer tise Pies Back Genre Sat Lagoon 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Cover Double page album Page number EE Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the Cover Options dialog box To display the Cover Options dialog box select Front or Front amp Back for Cover and click Options Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout consisting of two page master In a double page album you can arrange an image across the left and right pages You can customize the page numbers position font size etc in the Page Number Settings dialog box To display the Page Number Settings dialog box select the Page number checkbox and click Settings You can customize the margins of the front cover inside pages and back cover in the Margin Settings dialog box To display the Margin Settings dialog box click Margins 3 Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout 4 If you want to change the layout click Layout The Change Layout dialog box appear
333. ou fo dees cheers P pou are oot ues of ike lek gras 4a dees cleaning eeecge Fare Check 3 Cap ORO Meee ech mie Ink rhan re paar gian itg Faerie dhe Chaar cry ee pachi coed dees not bere atte rela chaning Aar he deep cw eed eee Roce Chori aed check wanita thet prinr haad coches hoe Gee iting ed 5 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Check the printed nozzle check pattern and click Quit on the Pattern Check dialog Dox See step 1 in Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern lf a particular color is not printed properly replace the ink tank of that color See Replacing an Ink Tank If the problem is not resolved open the Top Cover to confirm that the ink is remaining turn off the power then clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 0 of 539 pages If the problem is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center O Page top Aligning the Print Head Page 71 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Aligning the Print Head m Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory adjust the print head position You need
334. ource 3 Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Paper Size and Media Type Here we select 4 x6 10x15cm in Paper Size and the type of the loaded photo paper in Media Type Note f you select the wrong media type the printer may not print with the proper print quality 4 Click Layout Print Note To print photos in grayscale select Grayscale Photo 5 Select a layout and start printing 1 Select the layout of the photo Here we select Borderless full The preview appears in the selected layout for confirmation of the required print result Note You can change the direction of photo or crop a part of photo trimming to print For details on the operation refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Click Print Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Note Windows To cancel a print job in progress press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor To display the printer status monitor click Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name on the taskbar Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress click Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list click Pause Printer or Stop Jobs EE Note To print photos in grayscale we recommend sele
335. out 30 seconds a Important Do not load paper when the Power lamp is flashing Otherwise the paper or the printer may be damaged Loading Paper in the Front Tray Page 42 of 539 pages 4 Load paper 1 Make sure that the Power lamp is lit and the Front Feed button is flashing quickly If the Power lamp is flashing wait until it stops flashing and stays lit 2 Load the paper straight into the Front Tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING UP Align the front edge of the paper with the mark a Paper Alignment Mark on the Front Tray Load only one sheet of paper in the Front Tray at a time Note Align the right edge of the paper with the right side A of the Front Tray and load the paper straight into the Front Tray f paper is curled hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat For details on how to flatten curled paper refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide D Important f the printer is not used for about 5 minutes while it is as described in 1 in step 4 above the Front Feed button stops flashing and stays lit and you cannot load the paper in the Front Tray In this case return to 3 in step 3 5 Press the Front Feed button to feed the paper from the Front Tray The paper feeds into the printer automatically and the Front Feed button flashes slowly The printer is ready to start printing Note After
336. p Click OK When you execute print the printer starts printing by feeding paper from the front tray Load the paper in the front tray as instructed by the displayed message a Important When Fine Art Museum Etching Fine Art Premium Matte Canvas or Board Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab Paper Source is set to Front Tray and cannot be changed If Envelope is selected for Media Type on the Main tab front feed printing cannot be executed If L89x127mm was selected for Page Size on the Page Setup tab front feed printing cannot be executed When Duplex Printing is selected for Page Layout on the Page Setup tab Front Feed Printing cannot be performed If 14 x17 36x43cm was selected for Page Size on the Page Setup tab always select Front Tray for Paper Source Note Canon IJ Status Monitor can display guidelines for Front Feed Printing Display the Status Monitor by clicking View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab click Display Guide Message in the Option menu and make sure that Front Feed Printing is checked The instruction guide is displayed when you use Front Feed Printing Page top Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page 293 of 539 pages Advancediomde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Displaying the Print Results before Printing Displaying the Print Results before Printing You can display
337. pattern to determine the color direction in which you want to adjust the color balance R upper right direction Red Y upper direction Yellow G upper left direction Green C lower left direction Cyan B lower direction Blue Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Page 243 of 539 pages M lower right direction Magenta Select a specific direction such as Print in Direction R to print a pattern of the image adjusted in the selected direction The image with the current color balance values is printed at the bottom left For example select Print in Direction R to print a more detailed pattern of the portion in the R direction of the pattern for all directions the portion outlined in red in the figure below This allows you to check more variations than in all directions 5 Select Paper Size and Pattern Size EA Note You can crop the image before printing the pattern Move the white frame in Preview to change the cropping area Click Preview to display the print preview in a different window in which you can check the settings before printing m See Help for details on the Pattern Print window 6 Click Print The pattern is printed 7 Click OK 8 Select the image with the desired color balance from the printed pattern and enter the values indicated below the image into Color Balance 9 Click OK Page top Adjusting Brightness Contrast Page 244 of 539 pages Advanced Guide
338. pe orientation B can cause paper jams A B 7 Slide the Paper Guide to align it with the left side of the paper stack Do not slide the Paper Guide too hard The paper may not be fed properly Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark C Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 36 of 539 pages C 8 Close the Feed Slot Cover Note After loading paper Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size or Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver See Printing Documents Windows or Printing Documents Macintosh Loading Envelopes You can print on European DL and US Comm Env 10 sized envelopes The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope s direction by specifying with the printer driver properly D Important You cannot use the following envelopes Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive Note You cannot load envelopes in the Front Tray Load them in the Rear Tray 1 Prepare envelopes Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them If the envelopes are curled hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite direction WG f the corner of the envelope flap is folded flatten it Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page
339. pen a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Page top Other Settings Page 195 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings Easy PhotoPrint EX Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Page top Changing Layout Page 196 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX Changing Layout You can change the layout of each page separately Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen then click Change Layout Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK Album eos Apply to all pages au aa x D Important If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames Is increased in the new layout If
340. per Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print Ee Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Printing Page 135 of 539 pages Page top Printing Stickers Page 136 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Stickers You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos m Adding Text to
341. per Select the Detect paper width check box again once printing is complete and then click Send The Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet clear the Detect paper width check box and then click Send acintosh In the Canon IJ Printer Utility select Custom Settings in the pop up menu clear the Detect paper width check box and then click Send The settings here are also applied under Direct Printing from a digital camera Press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to clear the error and then load the paper correctly in the Front Tray according to the procedure described in Loading Paper and try printing again The remaining ink level cannot be correctly detected The lamp on the ink tank flashes Replace the ink tank and close the Top Cover Printing with an ink tank that was once empty may damage the printer If you want to continue printing in this condition you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level Press and hold the RESUME CANCEL button for at least 5 seconds and then release it With this operation releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any printer malfunction or damage caused by refilled ink tanks Routine Maintenance Note If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled the remaining ink level is not displayed correctly on the printer status monitor Windo
342. placed the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image Position Size Frame Position and size of the date The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited Inthe Replace Image dialog box you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Page top Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Page 204 of 539 pages Advanced amide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX T Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos You can adjust the position angle and size of images T Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click aa Edit Image or double click the image Le ae a Foston amp Sze Conment Center Postion From Left of Page EE mm From Top of Page 81 7 mm Rotation Tak Size Custom size F Lock aspect ratio Width 118 5454 mm Height 730 mm 6 Standard size Po Size e te a Set the Center Position Rotation and Size then click OK E Note You can also change the position and size of an image by dragging it in the Edit screen Select an image in the Edit screen then click Free Rotate and drag a corner of the image to rotate it See Help for details on the position and size of i
343. played message and click OK The second pattern is printed D Important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress 6 Look at the second printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column I that has the least noticeable vertical streaks a a Pa F r j l i i n 1 bk I e i i i ie La s b r BE ar m i i i i 1E ia 1 fT i cs C i i gt 1E E 1 r i ct i E i i gt m ial i 1 I oo 1 IE I i E i i 4 IE i E i J ra ia i F T a di Li 1 Er 7 be L T i E 1 z a bu L b l i i i r i oS L a a b r Di aa ct a i i i T T T E Lk g a L F pi 1 i i a a E i 1 a ke E 1 P Eni i i i i a i u j i i ki Lal L ii i F T T i i i E b EA Note If itis difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks HR HT F E Less noticeable vertical white streaks F More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column V then click Send Page top Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page 373 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Checking the Print Head Nozzles
344. plication software you use command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure print settings that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer driver setup window appears NS Important Opening the printer driver setup window through Properties displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software About tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows O Page top Maintenance Tab Page 332 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt Maintenance
345. power is turned on Load two sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray D Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for aligning the Print Head Load paper in the Rear Tray Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it D Important f the Inner Cover is open close it Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box See Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Adjust the print head position 1 Select Test Print in the pop up menu Page 3 of 539 pages Aligning the Print Head Page 74 of 539 pages 2 Click Print Head Alignment 1 Marcha Check a Brians ms hin bend aia heheh Abe ther prial hari occ ore Epei Dene Head db ete iif Esati pine head olga it camen rhe miihitin drad irri ow 3 Confirm the displayed message and click Align Print Head es wer PE preg ai ed rec shed dor bees poe phen De FE Sieg arjoa prij hrid alires mi Derr he eee immerdar p peg gee bhr pinire ceeds ee ihr rib By me tl chick aiy her ekki Ta miry pai teaa eel eget i Por brel cb e hridi maamaa ie Cepia eg pawl ee rih ioe Thr rp pgs TE p el OE i ee Lag ee Pc Ae a Prien Aipamen eater Coane 6 The print head alignment pattern will be printed and the printer will adjust the print head position automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer complete
346. pply of the printer and refrain from using it Leaving the printer plugged in may cause fire electric shock or damage to the printer depending on the thunder storm Use the power cable included with the printer Cleaning the printer Use a damp cloth to clean the printer Never use flammable solvents such Jas alcohol benzene or thinners If flammable solvents come in contact with electrical components inside the printer it could cause a fire or electric shock Safety Precautions Maintaining the printer Working around the printer AS Caution Page 4 of 539 pages Always unplug the printer from the power outlet before cleaning the printer If you accidentally switch the printer on while cleaning it you could injure yourself or damage the printer Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the printer There are no user serviceable parts inside the printer The printer contains high voltage components Never attempt any maintenance procedure not described in this guide Do not connect other than recommended devices to the Direct Print Port or cable connector on the printer It could cause a fire or electric shock Do not use highly flammable sprays near the printer This could cause a fire or electric shock if the spray comes into contact with electrical components inside the printer The following are instructions that if ignored could result in personal injury or material damage caused by i
347. press Enter a topic displayed in List of My Manual that topic is displayed in the Explanation window Note To delete a topic from List of My Manual select that topic from the list and then click Delete or press Delete Page top Symbols Used in This Document Page 102 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Symbols Used in This Document Symbols Used in This Document A Warning Instructions that if ignored could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation A Caution Instructions that if ignored could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation D Important Instructions that must be observed for safe operation EE Note Instructions as notes for operation or additional explanations Windows Indicates operations in Windows Indicates operations in Macintosh Page top Trademarks Page 103 of 539 pages Aa ete Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Trademarks Trademarks e Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation e Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries
348. printer Page top Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Page 392 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately A printer problem has occurred Disconnect the printer cable from the printer turn the printer off and then unplug the printer from the power supply Plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Cannot Install the Printer Driver Page 393 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Install the Printer Driver Cannot Install the Printer Driver e If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD ROM is inserted into your computer s disc drive Vindows Start the installation following the procedure below 1 Click Start then Computer In Windows XP click Start then My Computer In Windows 2000 double click the My Computer icon on the desktop 2 Double click the F CD ROM icon on the displayed window If the contents of the CD ROM are displayed double click MSETUP4 EXE acintoash Double click the CD ROM icon on your desktop to start installation EE Note a f the CD ROM icon is not displayed try the followings e Remove the CD ROM from your computer then insert it again e R
349. printing area Art Letter Margin 35 Size Printable Area width x height Art Letter Margin 35 8 0 x 8 2 inches 203 2 x 209 4 mm 1 38 in 35 0 mm te 1 36 in 35 0 mm ba T Lo kh 0 24 in 6 4 mm 0 24 in 6 3 mm EA Recommended printing area Page top Envelopes Page 446 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Envelopes Envelopes Size Recommended Printing Area width x height European DL 4 06 x 7 50 inches 103 2 x 190 5 mm US Comm Env 10 3 86 x 8 34 inches 98 0 x 211 8 mm 0 12 in 3 0 mm f 1 04in 26 5mm m as e a 0 13 in 3 4 mm 0 13 in 3 4 mm Recommended printing area Page top Deleting the Undesired Print Job Page 447 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Deleting the Undesired Print Job Deleting the Undesired Print Job If the printer does not start printing the print job data cancelled or failed may be remaining Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor 1 Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor Click the Status Monitor button displayed on the Task Bar The Canon lJ Status Monitor appears 2 Display the print jobs Click Display Print Queue The print queue window opens 3 Delete the print jobs Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu When the confirmation message appears click Yes T
350. propriate action The ink tank is not installed properly or empty Check the number of how many the Alarm lamp flashes and take the appropriate action to resolve the error Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange An ink tank that was once empty is installed See Thirteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action Ink tank errors have occurred Replace the ink tank m Routine Maintenance An error requiring servicing may have occurred The Power lamp flashes green and Alarm lamp flashes orange alternately Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Disconnect the USB cable between the printer and the PictBridge compliant device turn off the printer and unplug Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 433 of 539 pages the power cord of the printer from the power supply Plug the power cord of the printer back in turn on the printer and then reconnect the PictBridge compliant device to the printer If the same error occurs contact the service center Page top FAQs Page 434 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt FAQs FAQs s No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks m Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Cannot Install the Printer Driver gt Printing Does Not Start Printing Stops Before It Is Completed CEA Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Print Results No
351. puter Screen Page 425 of 539 pages according to the interface you are using e Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the printer directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 4 Make sure that the printer driver is installed correctly Uninstall the printer driver following the procedure described in Uninstalling the Printer Driver and reinstall it following the procedure described in your setup manual e Check 5 Check the status of the device on your computer Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device 1 Click Control Panel Hardware and Sound then Device Manager If the User Account Control screen is displayed follow the on screen instructions In Windows XP click Control Panel Performance and Maintenance System then click Device Manager on the Hardware sheet In Windows 2000 click Control Panel System then Device Manager on the Hardware sheet 2 Double click Universal Serial Bus controllers then USB Printing Support If USB Printing Support is not displayed make sure that the printer is correctly connected to the computer Check 3 Ma
352. quickly the Print Head Holder may not move to the replacement position In this case close the Top Cover press the Front Feed button then wait until the Front Feed button stops flashing and stays lit To continue printing from the Front Tray after replacing the ink tank follow the procedure from 3 in step 3 in Loading Paper in the Front Tray and start printing again Do not open the Inner Cover A when replacing the ink tank If the Inner Cover is open after Replacing an Ink Tank replacing the ink tank be sure to close it 3 Replace the ink tank with the lamp flashing fast Push the tab B and lift the ink tank to remove Do not touch the Print Head Lock Lever C B C D Important Handle the ink tank carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area Discard the empty ink tank according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables Note Do not remove two or more ink tanks at the same time Be sure to replace ink tanks one by one when replacing two or more ink tanks For details on ink lamp flashing speed see Checking the Ink Status 4 Prepare the new ink tank 1 Take the new ink tank out of its package pull the orange tape in the direction of the arrow to peel it off then remove the film 0 NY Important Make sure that the film is completely removed from the air hole D If the air hole is blocked with the remaining film ink may leak o
353. r that it is scheduled to be sent every six months for about four years The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon appears in the Dock when it is time to send the printer usage information In Mac OS X v 10 3 9 the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is not installed Read the instructions on the screen after clicking the icon then follow the procedure below a Thank you for your coop ration in Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program For development and marketing of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below recorded in your Canon product be collected on your Computer and tent to Canon through the internet Informition laiad to Canon inkpet pine 05 Version and language iniormaton Printers ID number installation dale and fem ink use infonmaion number of sheets printed amd maintenance information in hia survey we will fol collect of send any inlonmabon about your compuler other han that above OF any of your personal information For ihis reason iam he information that is seni i0 us We are unable io identity specific cusiomers We ane ereiore unable to respond lo requests io disclose any collected information The above information will be collected on this computer al intervals of about ome month information Will be DONeCIEO aviomatecaliy regung no cusiomar operatien 4 If you agr e thal we collect and send the information
354. r Cover is closed If the Inner Cover is opened close the Inner Cover and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer e Check 8 Does the Page Size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the printer Press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to clear the error Then check the Page Size setting in the Page Setup sheet Windows or the Page Setup dialog box Macintosh in the printer driver and load paper that is the same size as the setting and try printing again If printing does not start even when the paper loaded in the printer is the same as the setting set the printer driver not to detect the width of the paper Select the Detect paper width check box again once printing is complete and then click Send Printing Does Not Start Page 412 of 539 pages The Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet clear the Detect paper width check box and then click Send _acintosh In the Canon IJ Printer Utility select Custom Settings in the pop up menu clear the Detect paper width check box and then click Send The settings here are also applied under Direct Printing from a digital camera e Check 9 Are the Media Type and the Page Size settings of the printer driver correct When using Art Paper or non Canon genuine specialty paper be sure to select the type of each media from Media Type and a paper size which says Art XX Margin 35 from Paper size Confirm the settings following the procedure below and tr
355. r appears as a button on the Task Bar M0800 we iat Ponting Pages Wl Dispisy Print Gcue Cancel Brneng EE Note To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing open the printer driver setup window and click View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab When Errors Occur The Canon lJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed when an error occurs e g if the printer runs out of paper or if the ink is low The foirar pacer haa ur out Heis Type Photo Paper Fro T Page Size i lesa 8 5101 1 Lead paper inte lhem trary 2 Press the partes RESUME In such cases take the appropriate action as described Page top The Canon IJ Preview Page 334 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt The Canon IJ Preview The Canon IJ Preview The Canon lIJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout print sequence and number of pages You can also change the media type settings If you want to display a preview before printing open the printer driver setup window click the Main tab and check the Preview before printing check box If you do not want to display a preview befor
356. r in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click Be Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Printing an Index Page 190 of 539 pages Page top Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Page 191 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print You can print a variety of ID photos D Important The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use For details contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo To print ID photos select 4 x6 10x15cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select a layout of the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout Print screen CE A a e s File Beit Helo Dekati Hie Land ian ear be ed Cherk thee Previa ered dek the Print button Previrey charts AR ae gml EE Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example ID Photo 3 5x4 5cm You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selectio
357. r off for at least 15 minutes d Caution The Print Head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the printer Never touch the Print Head or nearby components e Check 3 Is the paper loaded Make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray or Front Tray If the printer has run out of paper load paper e Check 4 Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or illustrations Printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the printer and the computer to process during which the printer may appear to have stopped operating In addition when printing data that uses a large amount of ink continuously on plain paper the printer may pause temporarily In either case wait until the process is complete Note If you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document printing may pause to allow the ink to dry Page top Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Page 414 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected e Check 1 Are the Print Head nozzles clogged Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a par
358. r rvagets Back Covent 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures D Important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser EX the folder tree area will not be displayed The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails 3 Select the image s you want to print and click one of the buttons below To print on the front cover click Import to Front Cover To print on the inside pages click Import to Inside Pages To print on the back cover click Import to Back Cover The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click Delete All Imported Images EE Note Selecting a Photo Page 121 of 539 pages See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Editing Page 122 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ege ata apnee
359. re photo is corrected automatically and the p Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 6 Click Exit D Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 153 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Red Eye Correction Function Using the Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash You can perform the Red Eye Correction function either automatically or manually Note Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing To correct automatically select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of t
360. rererititrirititrtri tite Trivett Pree eeraritr TrITreeivi trier ititetii te Eola rg Check FREA ON sepii Chet fhe Print Betton to pring with the gareng petinggi Printing starts Prente Canon AN Copag Paper gie Proto Seer Pagar pppu Meda Type iess Photo Paper seem Prin Quality dupka Printing EH Dondariess Priecing Prini PHR 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EE Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box To display the Adjust Print Position dialog box click Print Position You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print EE Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen 0 Printing Page 142 of 539 pages Page top Printing Layout Page 143 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a
361. ries Prieting Preferences TR Cseh Setup Man 2A Page Setup of Etects AJ Martenance Prato Paper Pro Letter 8 976117 215 Se oo Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box Images within each page are optimized on an image by image basis EE Note Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been processed such as being cropped or rotated In this case the entire page will be treated as a single image to be optimized 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the images will be printed with color compensation N Important Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when e Background is set in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 325 of 539 pages Define Stamp is selected in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab and the bitmapped stamp is configured Note Depending on images the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect Page top gt Reducing Photo Noise Page 326 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Reducing Photo Noise Reducing Photo Noise With the Photo Noise Reduction function you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the image quality
362. rinted in the source color space Adobe RGB or sRGB ase 4 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images e Source image sRGB e Application Applications in which ICC profiles can cannot be set Printing from Other Applications Page 508 of 539 pages Print result Resulting image edited retouched sRGB image printed e 5 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones e Source image sRGB e Application Applications in which ICC profiles can cannot be set e Print result sRGB image printed using Canon Digital Photo Color Previous Next Page top Case 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Page 509 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Other Applications gt Case 1 ig by Utilizing the Source Color Space ase 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space int an edited retouched image by utilizing the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB supported by gt input ICC profile from an application other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro in which input ICC files can be identified set 1 Specifying an ICC Profile within an Application 1 Open the image you want to print in an application other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro Edit retouch the image as needed 2 Check that the correct ICC profile has been assigned select the item that allows the application to manage colors then specify the profile for printing For example in Ado
363. rinting on DVD CDs gt Troubleshooting gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen Message Appears on the Computer Screen Windows Errors About DVD CD Printing Are Displayed m ME Message 1001 Is Displayed p MEE Error Number 1002 Is Displayed MEET Message 1850 Is Displayed LATTES Errors About DVD CD Printing Are Displayed e Check 1 Is the CD R Tray placed properly Open the Inner Cover properly place the CD R Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer E is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 2 Is the DVD CD placed on the CD R Tray Properly place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray attach the CD R Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with this printer E is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 3 Unrecognizable DVD CD may be placed Canon recommends that you use DVD CDs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer e Check 4 Is the DVD CD on the CD R Tray already printed If you place a DVD CD on which has already been printed on the CD R Tray the CD R Tray may be ejected In this case change the settings of the printer driver and try printing again e Clear the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray chec
364. ro Settings gt Saving Print Settings Easy PhotoPrint Pro Saving Print Settings You can save frequently used combinations of paper size media type color adjustment etc as custom profiles Saved profiles can be loaded from a list This allows you to print photos instantly with your favorite settings Click Add in the Printer Settings window to display the Add to Profiles dialog box Enter Name and Description then click OK Add to Profiles Name Description Details Parameter Setting Printer Canon xe Paper Size Ad Media Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Paper Source Rear Tray Print Quality Standard Grayscale Photo OFF Color Balance Cyan Magenta 0 Yellow O Brightness Contrast Calar binde T N Important Enter up to 64 characters in Name Default or Custom cannot be used for Name Enter up to 256 characters in Description EE Note Click Edit Delete in the Printer Settings window to edit names and descriptions or delete profiles Page top Printing with Other Application Software Page 257 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data m Overview of the Printer Driver Page top Various Printing Methods Page 258 of 539 pages A
365. rom Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable if Poster is selected for Page Layout Note By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate you can perform printing so that papers are collated one by one starting from the last page These settings can be used in combination with Borderless Normal size Fit to Page Scaled Page Layout and Duplex Printing Page top Setting the Stapling Margin Page 263 of 539 pages Adyancedicmde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Stapling Margin Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the stapling direction and the width of the stapling margin is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the side to be stapled Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best staple position If you want to change the setting select from the list satu E Man 2 Page Soup gf Biects Aj Martensnce El Page Sge Leter 3 5711 a Disini a i Par A Lanei Rotate 150 degress a Pome Pager pii Same os Page Sine Faya Lmt hona Lamar D5411 215 227a Homan Bortelens Hitaz Scaled Page Layout a Ea 3 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the width of the stapling mar
366. rom Media Type in the printer driver The printed surface may be scratched or a malfunction may occur if Media Type is set to anything other than Board Paper Paper that is thicker than 1 2 mm 47 mil cannot be used e Check 6 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion Reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 406 of 539 pages 1 Open the printer properties dialog box Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows iad Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Manual for Color Intensity and then click Set 3 Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity 1 Open the Print dialog box m Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh 2 Select Color Options in the pop up menu 3 Drag the Intensity slide bar to set the intensity Check 7 Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper the lower edge of the paper may become stained with ink Resize your original document i
367. ross Att RedEye Comection eo Face Erhi a Feces Dhage 1 3 a Week j Slory Sate Let Ae pl ere Lo Sol e eae P oS Digs Face Sronthirg of Shih Fete 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 160 of 539 pages Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit a Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 161 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles
368. rtical streaks Manual Print Head Alignment Page 369 of 539 pages is P in _ Ca a p 4 La i Ps CE i i DORR EREREEE i P al E LLI i a ia ia r T fa fod i u fd i i il aA n E Lal oo ss 7 J 1 al Fr I 1 a if bal al i 1 i LE E m EA Note If itis difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks PEPDPEEES iHi bi I A Less noticeable vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column H then click OK EE Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern in column H pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks C Less noticeable vertical white streaks D More noticeable vertical white streaks 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The second pattern is printed D Important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress 6 Look at the second printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column I that has the least noticeable vertical streaks Manual Print Head Alignment Page 3 0 of 539 pages m dis LE i F F r i i i L k I b E Fr La k F ka nl E i i i in ta E E Li s E a i in ia i F E e
369. s In the Change Layout dialog box you can change the layout or select whether to print the date on Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 119 of 539 pages which the picture was taken on the photo Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation Double page album or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout dialog box and click Date Settings 5 If you want to change the background click Background The Change Background dialog box appears In the Change Background dialog box you can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 120 of 539 pages Advancediamde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Sela rages for aban Vou can aso addireplere images buar i che ading procer To conei pr anhy mages cik the CoragyEnhange butis App poppe aod SAAN CQ IMENTS ini Wp gpI praan tal gt i i Sgt by Dats v MEDIEI AIH THG0001_s 09 Front Covar Q 1 Fade Page
370. s layout to print borderless photos E Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer paper size and media type 3 Click Print wa Important m When you print on large size paper such as A3 A3 some computers cannot print properly if you print more than one page or copy at a time It is recommended that you print page by page when you print on such paper m While printing on paper larger than A4 or printing high resolution images data may be printed only to the middle if many images are printed at one time In such cases select the Spool print job page by page checkbox in the Preferences dialog box and then print again To display the Preferences dialog box click Be Settings or select Preferences from the File menu When Fine Art is selected for Paper Size a 1 38 inch 85 mm margin is automatically left at the top and bottom of the paper It is recommended that you check the print range with the image shown in Preview before printing Printing Page 115 of 539 pages White streaks may appear at the top and bottom edges of grayscale photos In that case print with a 45 mm 1 77 inch or more margin at the top and bottom edges If you select Bordered Margin 45 from the layouts images will be reduced when printing to allow a 45 mm 1 77 inch eliotn at the ioe and bottom edges relative to the printing direction Files Dak bipi pli md h PT Di ae Peive pf ii h Pera be Patra tit je
371. s not been installed or has been uninstalled To install My Printer select My Printer in Custom Install To start My Printer from the Start menu select All Programs Programs in Windows 2000 Canon Utilities My Printer then My Printer Page top Loading Paper Page 31 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper Loading Paper This section describes types of paper you can load and how to load printing paper in the Rear Tray or Front Tray Loading Paper Paper Source to Load Paper Notes on Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Loading Paper in the Front Tray Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Handling Paper Page top Loading Paper Page 32 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Paper Source to Load Paper Notes on Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Loading Paper in the Front Tray Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Handling Paper m Paper Source to Load Paper The printer has two paper sources to feed paper Rear Tray and Front Tray Select either one of the paper sources depending on the size or type of paper to load See Media Types You Can Use Loading Two or More Sheets of Paper in the Rear Tray You can load various sizes of paper from 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm to A3 13 x 19 paper in the Rear Tray Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loade
372. s that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Page top Questions and Answers Page 173 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Easy PhotoPrint EX Questions and Answers m How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from How Do Print with Even Margins What Is C1 or C4 Page top How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page 174 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Can Move or Copy the Saved File How Can Move or Copy the Saved File If you want to move or copy a file created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another you need to move or copy the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as well For example when you save a file named MyAlbum el1 a folder named MyAlbum el1 Data is automatically created in the same folder that contains the MyAlbum el1 file If you want to move or copy the MyAlbum el1 file to another folder move or copy the MyAlbum el1 Data folder as well The MyAlboum el1 Data folder contains the photos used in the album MyAlbum ell 8 Data MyAlbum ell EE Note a The icons may vary depending on the items D Important Do not change the Data folder n
373. s that you use DVD CDs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer e Check 3 Is the DVD CD on the CD R Tray already printed If you place a DVD CD on which has already been printed on the CD R Tray the CD R Tray may be ejected In this case change the settings of the printer driver and try printing again e Clear the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box in Custom Settings on the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box then click Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and click Send Note If the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box is cleared printing may start without the DVD CD loaded Selecting the check box prevents the CD R Tray from getting dirty _acintosh Message 1850 Is Displayed e Check Open the Inner Cover then place the CD R Tray properly Open the Inner Cover place the CD R Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page top Cannot Print on DVD CDs Page 350 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Print on DVD CDs Cannot Print on DVD CDs m DVD CD Printing Does Not Start CD R Tray Does Not Feed Properly CD R Tray Jammed DVD CD Printing Does Not Start e Check 1 Is the CD R Tray placed properly Open the Inner Cover properly place the CD R
374. s the printing of the print head alignment pattern This takes about 4 minutes i ihe PE IMENA Lik i r i UL a E T a Aligning the Print Head Page 75 of 539 pages i EE Note f the automatic adjustment of the print head position has failed the Alarm lamp flashes Refer to Eleven flashes of Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide f the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above align the Print Head manually Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide O Page top Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 6 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers If the Paper Feed Rollers are dirty or paper powder is attached to them paper may not be fed properly In this case clean the Paper Feed Rollers Cleaning will wear out the Paper Feed Rollers so perform this only when necessary You need to prepare three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper B i 1 VVindows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and remove any paper from the printer 2 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it D Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Open the printer driver setup
375. s to be checked before printing the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern O Page top Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 61 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern m Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern and clean the Print Head if necessary 1 Check if there are horizontal white streaks in the pattern 1 and or pattern 2 1 2 If there are horizontal white streaks in the pattern 1 Cleaning the print head nozzles of ink group 1 BK R G PC or PM is required If there are horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 Cleaning the print head nozzles of ink group 2 C M or Y is required If there are horizontal white streaks in both the pattern 1 and pattern 2 Cleaning the print head nozzles of all ink colors is required A B A Good no horizontal white streaks B Bad horizontal white streaks are present 2 Take the appropriate action When cleaning is not required Click Exit Windows or Quit Macintosh on the Pattern Check dialog box to exit nozzle check pattern examination When cleaning is required 1 Click Cleaning Windows Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern i l l l l l i i l l i I I I I l 1 i i Tayre aA T
376. screen images will be reduced when printing to allow a 45 mm 1 77 inch margin at the top and bottom edges relative to the prta direction Babiat iat Lita yini ead by PT i ae Feje pee iii h Pera bg Perieg ih TAEA Printing Photos in Grayscale Page 182 of 539 pages Note When the Grayscale Photo checkbox is selected preview images appear in grayscale in the Layout Print screen However they appear in color in the Correct Enhance Images window In the Adjust Grayscale window you can adjust the black color tone of grayscale photos To display the Adjust Grayscale window select the Grayscale Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen and click 44 Adjust Grayscale in the Layout Print screen See Help for details Page top Printing Vivid Photos Page 183 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Vivid Photos Printing Vivid Photos Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing P i Hera Preto Print teal eae Photel wh Ble Edt view Help Select the prie oie Hian seri the Line aed hte oF peer het pEr pines Eamon Peso ReaTigy Dapre Phot iv Vad Polo al Prats Mop Fi mitir I Hz miil Pack Sim Pho f sa Pia 9 Photo Pepe Piol o Gayl Pies Paget Fis Pree Figer Fert Pi ast Gilocy Pho Pa
377. se behind the printer There are wheels on the back corners of the printer Lift up the front of the printer to move it back and forth Note You can load A3 13 x 19 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 Letter Legal 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm Tabloid Wide 4 x 7 1 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 10 x 12 25 x 30 cm and 14 x 17 36 x 43 cm sizes of paper in the Front Tray When printing on paper other than 14 x 17 36 x 43 cm size from a PictBridge compliant device load paper in the Rear Tray For details on paper that can be used for a PictBridge compliant device refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 1 Set the Front Tray in the front paper feeding position 1 Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it 3 Lift the Front Tray until it stops The Front Feed button lights 4 While keeping the Front Tray lifted tilt the Front Tray forward to set it in the front paper feeding position Loading Paper in the Front Tray Page 41 of 539 pages 5 Make sure that the Front Feed button is lit 3 Prepare for loading paper 1 Pull out the Front Tray Extension 2 Press the right corner of the Front Feed Support to open the V shaped Support Note When loading A4 or smaller size paper this procedure is not necessary 3 Press the Front Feed button The printer starts making operating noise then the Power lamp flashes for ab
378. se of Images Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images It may be unlawful to print the following documents The list provided is non exhaustive When in doubt check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction Paper money Traveler s checks Money orders Food stamps Certificates of deposit Passports Postage stamps canceled or Immigration papers uncanceled Internal revenue stamps canceled or Identifying badges or insignias uncanceled Selective service or draft papers Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Checks or drafts issued by Stock certificates governmental agencies Copyrighted works works of art without Motor vehicle licenses and permission of copyright owner certificates of title O Page top Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 83 of 539 pages Contents gt Appendix gt Tips on How to Use Your Printer Tips on How to Use Your Printer This section introduces the tips on how to use your printer and for printing with optimal quality E Ink is used for various purposes How is ink used for various purposes other than printing Ink may be used for purposes other than printing Ink is not only used for printing but also for cleaning the Print Head to maintain the optimal printing quality The printer has the function to automatically clean the ink jet nozzles to prevent clogging In the cleaning procedure ink is pumped out from the no
379. se these parts to become smudged a When printing in grayscale depending on an image the printing troubles may occur on the top and or bottom edges of the paper such as uneven coloration or white streaks Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Letter Legal Envelopes m Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes m Sizes for Art Paper Page top Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page 443 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes SI Printable Area width x height AS 5 56 X 7 95 inches 141 2x2020mm A 8 00 x 11 38 inches 203 2 x 289 0mm AS 44x 16 2 inches 290 2x 4120mm A3 13 x 19 32 9 x 48 3 cm 12 7 x 18 7 inches 322 2x475 0mm BB 6 90 x 9 80 inches 175 2x249 0mm B40 9 9 x 14 inches 250 2x356 0mm 4 x6 10x15cem 8 73 x 5 69 inches 94 8 x 1444mm 4 x8 10x20cm 18 73 X 7 69 inches 94 8 x 195 2mm 5 x7 13x18cm 4 73 x 6 69 inches 120 2 x 169 8mm 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8mm 0 7 x 16 7 inches 272 6 x 423 8mm 8 x10 20x25cm 7 73 x 9 69 inches 196 4 x 246 0mm 10 x 12 254 0 x 304 8 mm 9 7 x 11 7 inches 247 2 x 296 8 mm 14 x 17 355 6 x 431 8mm 13 7 x 16 7 inches 348 8 x 423 8mm Wide 8 78 X 6 80 inches 94 8x 1726mm 1 38 in 35 0 mm J 0 12 in 3 0 mm ime 0 2 in 5 0 mm 1 2in 30 5 mm i i i E i i m A 0
380. so that it just touches the left edge of the stack e When you load the paper on the Front Tray load one sheet at a time with the print side facing UP Insert the paper straight into the Front Tray so that the front edge of the paper aligns with the 3 mark on the Front Tray then align the right edge of the paper against the right side of the Front Tray Loading Paper e Check 2 Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or curled Loading Paper e Check 3 If you are using art paper that is not produced by Canon make sure that the paper is 200 gsm 53 Ib or less Printing cannot be done from the Rear Tray if the paper is too heavy Check the paper s package for information on its weight If it is more than 200 gsm 53 Ib load it in the Front Tray e Check 4 Make sure of the following when you load envelopes When printing on envelopes refer to Loading Paper and prepare the envelopes before printing Once you have prepared the envelopes load them in portrait orientation If the envelopes are placed in landscape orientation they will not feed properly e Check 5 Remove the foreign object in the Front Tray e Check 6 Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the Rear Tray Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 418 of 539 pages If the paper tears in the Rear Tray see Paper Jams to remove tt If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the printer unplug it
381. space are reproduced to the nearest level Select this when you want to print in colors that are close to the original image Perceptual Reproduces the image focusing on the use of popular color tones Select this Printing with ICC Profiles Adobe RGB sRGB Page 222 of 539 pages when you want to print the photo 7 Click OK 8 Click Print The Print dialog box appears 9 Click OK Note You can also change the color balance brightness and contrast of the image m Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Contrast Page top Printing Edited Retouched sRGB Images Page 223 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Beautiful Photos gt Printing Edited Retouched sRGB Images Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Edited Retouched sRGB Images You can print edited retouched sRGB images in the edited retouched state N Important You may not be able to print with this setting depending on the printer type 1 Start Easy PhotoPrint Pro and select the photo you want to print The photo appears in the bottom right area of the screen EA Note See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adjustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Click the Color Management tab Corector Col Management Colu Mode Enable IOC Frohle Finke Profile
382. start your computer acintosh On screen manuals other than printer driver s help are uninstalled at a time 1 Select Applications on the Go menu 2 Double click the Canon Utilities folder and then the IJ Manual folder 3 Drag the folder of your printer s name into the trash 4 Drag the Canon XXX On screen Manual icon where XXX is your printer s name on your desktop into the trash Page top Transporting the Printer Page 455 of 539 pages Sdvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Transporting the Printer Transporting the Printer When relocating the printer pack the printer using the original packing materials If you do not have the original packing materials pack the printer carefully using protective material and place it inside a sturdy box NY Important Do not transport or store the printer slanted vertically or upside down as the ink may leak and damage the printer 1 Turn the printer off 2 Confirm that the Power lamp is off and unplug the printer N Important a Do not unplug the printer while the Power lamp is lit or flashing green as it may cause malfunction or damage to the printer making the printer unable to print 3 Retract the Front Tray the Front Feed Support and the Paper Support 4 Disconnect the printer cable from the computer and from the printer and then disconnect the power plug from the printer 5 Use adhesive tape to secure all th
383. t Fradatie Liai S 3 Click OK rt Printing 1 Set the Paper Size Media Type and Layout 2 Click Print MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top Case 3 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Page 503 of 539 pages al Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers gt Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro gt Case 3 g with Canon s Unique Color Tones ase 3 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones nt SRGB images using Canon Digital Photo Color Q Bavice non Digital Photo Color allows you to print images in popular beautiful color tones This is hieved by producing high contrast with sharp three dimensional feel while reproducing the nuine colors of the original image 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro 1 Open the image you want to print in an Easy PhotoPrint Pro compatible application 2 Start Easy PhotoPrint Pro memo e To start Easy PhotoPrint Pro see the following section Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro 2 Opening the Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Select the image for which you want to adjust the color from the Page List area 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adjustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Setting the Color Mode 1 Click the Color Management tab 2 Select Ph
384. t index print grayscale print or print using Adobe RGB For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide EE Note Easy PhotoPrint Pro is only compatible with Adobe Photoshop CS Photoshop CS2 Photoshop CS3 Photoshop Elements 6 or Digital Photo Professional Ver 2 1 or later For updated compatibility visit our website far ie i RREN ITIR F Wf ey i i in oe ecw 2 rn Vien uM Melis pt Mee ae Bld Color management function compatible with Adobe RGB Adobe RGB sRGB Print in various layouts m Ta 1 i yE i Bordered full print Index print Color correction while viewing a sample pattern Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 18 of 539 pages Cool Tone Black White Default Warm Tone E Note Ambient light correction function When you use Easy PhotoPrint Pro in Windows Vista you can print using the ambient light correction function Ambient light correction is a function that reduces the differences in the way images appear depending on the place where they are viewed displayed or exhibited You can print in color tones suitable for each lighting condition O Page top Printing Documents Windows Page 19 of 539 pages Contents gt Printing Photos Documents gt Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Windows This section describes the procedure using the settings to print a document of A4 size on plain paper as a
385. t parts For example by plying this effect you can print a photo of blue sky and shadows without losing the details in gt shadowy parts 1 Opening an Image in an Application 1 Open the image you want to print in an application other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro Edit retouch the image as needed 2 Check that the correct ICC profile SRGB has been assigned then select the item for managing colors using ICC profiles For example in Adobe Photoshop select Printer Manages Colors for Color Handling L Opening the Print Settings Screen of the Printer Driver 1 Select the Print command from the application menu Example Click File gt Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Preferences or Properties The Print Settings screen of the printer driver appears Status Heady Location Page Range Sa Selection Curent Page Pages Case 4 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Page 519 of 539 pages 3 Opening the Manual Color Adjustment Dialog Box 1 Select the Main tab 2 Set the Media Type and Print Quality 3 Click Manual for Color Intensity Mada Tipa Phata Pape Pht sssr ll Papar See Pict Chualty ORA Fag Photo Paper Fius Gloesy I Latter 28117 215 Se Sn 4 Click Set to the right of Manual The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box appears 4 Setting the Color Correction and Color Mode 1 Select the Matching tab 2 Select Driver Matching for
386. t Pro Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro nis section explains how to print digital camera photos using Easy PhotoPrint Pro an pplication supplied with this printer after opening then editing retouching them in Adobe hotoshop CS Adobe Photoshop CS2 Adobe Photoshop CS3 Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or igital Photo Professional of MEMO e Easy PhotoPrint Pro can only be started after installing Easy PhotoPrint Pro supplied with this printer on a computer on which Adobe Photoshop CS Adobe Photoshop CS2 Adobe Photoshop CS3 Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or Digital Photo Professional is installed For updated compatibility visit our website gt gt For details refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Using the XPS printer driver enables you to print in the High Dynamic Range full 16 bit workflow gt gt For details refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro ase 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space e Source image Adobe RGB or sRGB e Print result Image printed using an ICC profile ase 2 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images e Source image sRGB e Print result Resulting image edited retouched sRGB image printed ase 3 Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones e Source image sRGB e Print result sRGB image printed using Canon Digital Photo Color ase 4 Printing Accord
387. t Satisfactory Paper Jams Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page top lf You Cannot Resolve the Problem Page 435 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter please contact the seller of the printer or the service center Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers AN Caution a If the printer emits any unusual sound smoke or odor turn it off immediately Unplug the power cord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center Never attempt to repair or disassemble the printer yourself Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the printer will invalidate any warranty regardless of whether the warranty has expired Before contacting the service center confirm the following e Product name Your printer s name is located on the front cover of the setup manual e Serial number please refer to the setup manual e Details of the problem e What you tried to solve the problem and what happened Page top Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 436 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Instructions for Use Printer Driver Instructions for Use Printer Driver This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions Keep the following points in mind w
388. t have such a function or if the document does not print correctly use the printer driver to set the values 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Select the paper size Select Custom for Page Size on the Page Setup tab a B ogy a a l Taea 21 ae inches 50 1652 1100 inches 5 00 26 61 cwn J e 4 Set the custom size in the application software Specify Units and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used Then click OK Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 295 of 539 pages 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified paper size NY Important If you use a custom paper size to print specify the size of paper correctly in the Custom Paper Size dialog box If an error message appears when you use the specified paper size uncheck the Detect Paper Width check box on the Custom Settings dialog box of the Maintenance tab Related Topic Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page top Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Page 296 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Printing a
389. t the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list Now you have finished setting 2 by 2 page poster printing 4 Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box and then click OK Poster Printing Page 274 of 539 pages Poster Printing Enee gigg Penge Disert Deeded inte 4 2x2 E J Pi Ca Pade hee J Pred Dut Pee inea in maena oA Pages separated by comma For egie 13 612 o coce Dems Image Divisions Select the number of divisions vertical x horizontal from the Image Divisions list As the number of divisions increases the number of sheets used for printing increases allowing you to create a larger poster Print Cut Paste in margins To leave out words Cut and Paste uncheck this check box D Important This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used Print Cut Paste lines in margins To leave out cut lines uncheck this check box Pages To reprint only specific pages enter the page number you want to print To print multiple pages specify by separating the pages with commas or entering a hyphen between the page numbers Note You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the setup preview 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the docum
390. t when printing on paper 7 Direct Print Port Connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera to print directly See Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device A Warning Do not connect any equipment other than PictBridge compliant devices to the Direct Print Port of the printer This may cause fire electric shock or damage to the printer N Important Main Components Page 8 of 539 pages Do not touch the metal casing 8 Front Tray Printed paper ejects here Open it before printing Load paper in the Front Tray to print on large size paper such as 14 x 17 36 x 43 cm paper or on thick paper See Loading Paper in the Front Tray and Media Types You Can Use 9 Front Tray Extension Pull out to support paper Pull it out before printing 10 10 Power button Press to turn the power on or off D Important Disconnecting the power plug When disconnecting the power plug after turning off the power be sure to confirm that the Power lamp is not lit If the power plug is disconnected from the wall outlet while the Power lamp is lit or flashing the printer may become unable to print properly since the Print Head is not protected Note Auto power on off feature You can set the printer to turn on or off automatically Auto Power On Automatically turns on the printer when print data is sent from the computer Auto Power Off Automatically turns off the printer wh
391. t with Easy PhotoPrint Pro to start Easy PhotoPrint Pro 2 Opening the Color Adjustment Dialog Box Case 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Page 499 of 539 pages 1 Select the image for which you want to adjust the color from the Page List area 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adjustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears Setting the Color Mode and Printer Profile 1 Click the Color Management tab E Color Mode Enable ICC Pendle Prison Prot Renduirg Intent Falaire Colonmalins 2 Select Enable ICC Profile for Color Mode 3 Select Auto for Printer Profile memo e You can also print with a specific profile by selecting one from the list Normally select Auto If a new ICC profile for Canon brand paper is added download it and select it from the list Checking the Application Settings 4 Select a method for Rendering Intent and click OK 4 Printing 1 Set the Paper Size Media Type and Layout 2 Click Print Case 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Page 500 of 539 pages of MEMO e For details on printing procedures and other settings refer to Using Easy PhotoPrint Pro in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top 4 Case 2 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Page 501 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Pr
392. tching Media Types You Can Use Page 45 of 539 pages Fine Art Paper Not loadable Fine Art Premium Premium Matte Matte lt FA PM1 gt 8 For printing business documents T High Resolution A3 13 x 19 20 sheets 1 sheet 50 sheets High Resolution Paper Paper A3 50 sheets lt HR 101N gt A4 and Letter 80 sheets For creating your own prints T Shirt Transfers 1 sheet 1 sheet 6 T Shirt Transfers lt TR 301 gt Photo Stickers Glossy Photo Paper lt PS 101 gt 10 1 Paper with a Model Number is Canon genuine paper Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side and notes on handling paper For information on the page sizes available for each Canon genuine paper visit our website You may not be able to purchase some Canon genuine papers depending on the country or region of purchase Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number Purchase paper by name 2 Maximum number of sheets that can be ejected and stacked on the Front Tray when feeding paper from the Rear Tray When feeding paper from the Front Tray remove each sheet as it is ejected 3 Proper feeding of paper may not be possible at the maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature or humidity In such cases reduce the number of paper you load at a time to less than half 100 recycled paper can be used 4 14 x 17 36 x 43 cm paper
393. te 30 seconds Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head Charen Chara dogged poi head recess Sat T George ink group for cle Fo re met nara al che ik Geaep for eship dah Haaai Derk Charing Sargeras ink iniia Check reves Cana 4 Page 65 of 539 pages Cleaning the Print Head Page 66 of 539 pages 5 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Check the printed nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Note f the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice clean the Print Head deeply See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply O Page top Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 67 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head Deeply mg Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the Print Head clean the Print Head deeply Cleaning the Print Head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the Print Head so clean the Print Head deeply only when necessary You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper VVindows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on
394. ted ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head Printing Documents Macintosh Page 26 of 539 pages Page top Other Usages Page 27 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Other Usages Other Usages This section describes the function to print photos from your PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera connecting with a USB cable This section also introduces other useful functions Solution Menu and My Printer Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Solution Menu and My Printer Page top Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 28 of 539 pages EBLA Contents gt Other Usages gt Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Connecting the PictBridge compliant device to the printer with a USB cable that is recommended by the device s manufacturer you can print saved images directly For the basic features of printing from a PictBridge compliant digital camera such as compatible media types available layouts and image correction function refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide For details on the print settings on the PictBridge compliant device refer to the instruction manual supplied with the device Connectable devices Any PictBridge compliant device can be connected to the printer regardless of the manufacturer or model
395. the Background list Changing and Saving Some Background Settings 1 Select the background for which the settings are to be changed Check the Background check box in the Stamp Background dialog box and then select the title of the background you want to change from the Background list 2 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens 3 While viewing the preview set the items on the Background tab 4 Save the background Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab If you want to save the background with a different title type a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Saving Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 288 of 539 pages Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1 Click Select Background in the Stamp Background dialog box The Background Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the background to be deleted Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings tab and then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again O Page top gt Printing an Envelope Page 289 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with O
396. the Commonly Used Settings list Note Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted Page top Managing the Printer Power Page 380 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Managing the Printer Power Managing the Printer Power This function allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows Power Off The Power Off function turns off the printer If you use this function you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Execute power off Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab When the confirmation message appears click OK The printer power switches off and the Maintenance tab is displayed again _ Auto Power The Auto Power Off function automatically turns off the printer when print data has not been received from the computer for a specified period of time The Auto Power On function automatically turns on the printer upon reception of print data 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Make sure that the printer is on and then click Auto Power on the Maintenance tab The Auto Power Settings dialog box opens Note If the printer is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect
397. the On screen Manual Advanced Guide Previous Next Page top Printing Grayscale Photos from Other Applications Page 537 of 539 pages tal Photo Printing Guid Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing in Grayscale gt Printing Grayscale Photos from Other Applications Printing Grayscale Photos from Other Applications lis section explains how to print grayscale photos from applications other than Easy PhotoPrint ao MEMO e Using the XPS printer driver enables you to print in the High Dynamic Range full 16 bit workflow from Windows Vista Photo Gallery gt gt For details refer to XPS Printer Driver in the On screen Manual Advanced Guide 1 Opening an Image in an Application Open the image you want to print in grayscale in an application other than Easy PhotoPrint Pro memo e The opened image is converted to grayscale as an SRGB image when printing with Grayscale Printing selected Convert Adobe RGB images to sRGB images by following the corresponding procedure in your application 2 Opening the Print Settings Screen of the Printer Driver 1 Select the Print command from the application menu Example Click File gt Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Preferences or Properties Printing Grayscale Photos from Other Applications Page 538 of 539 pages lm Prnt Select Printer pel Printer 4 Microsof APS Decument Writer Status Ready
398. the number of layout Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the frames is decreased pages with the current layout can be fitted If you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames any image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted starting with the last image that was added to the former layout page Ee Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Calendar Changing Layout Page 197 of 539 pages Edit Took JA a AAEE t Apply to all pages Seo aes a Important The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Layout Print Change Layout 006 oo a a a Apply to all pages aaee Ble D Important If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages with the new layout will be adde
399. ther Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing an Envelope Printing an Envelope For details on how to load an envelope into the printer refer to Loading Paper in the Rear Tray in the manual Basic Guide The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows 1 Load an envelop into the printer Fold down the envelope flap Orient the envelope so that the flap is on the left and the folded surface is facing down 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Select the media type Select Envelope from the Media Type list on the Main tab g Preferencet A Cuek Sap S Man A Page Sete af Broca AA Martensnce SS 4 Select the paper size Click the Page Setup tab and select Youkei 4 Youkei 6 Comm Env 10 or DL Env for Page Size 5 Select the landscape for orientation To print the addressee horizontally select Landscape for Orientation 6 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the information is printed on the envelope Printing an Envelope Page 290 of 539 pages Page top Front Feed Printing Page 291 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Front Feed Printing Front Feed Printing If you are printing on th
400. ticular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center e Check 2 Has the ink run out Open the Top Cover then check the status of ink lamp Routine Maintenance e Check 3 Is the orange tape or protective film remaining Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the air hole is exposed as illustrated in A If the orange tape is left as in B pull the orange tape and remove it Page top Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Page 415 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected e Check 1 Is printing performed in Quiet Mode Print speed is reduced if you specified to print in Quiet Mode in the printer driver For faster printing do not print in Quiet Mode m Reducin
401. ting Page 2 6 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Booklet Printing Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet Data is printed on both sides of the paper This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly in page number order when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set booklet printing Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the Settings Preview on the left side of the window Aa A cele iail a EErEE El Page Sue a ieii im Perm A Langeipi O D Rye 189 deyen B peer Pees Lira r Plain Papir Less 85 11 715227 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list 4 Set the margin for stapling and the margin width Click Specify specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box and then click OK Magin F Fage Border ee ee ee i Booklet Printing Page 277 of 539 pages Margin for stapling Select which side the stapling margin should be on when the booklet is completed Insert blank page To le
402. ting data on this printer The Ganon U pater drove converts ihe pini data crealed by your Windows application ime dala hal your Printer Can understand and sends the converted data t the printer Becaute diferent models support diferent pom data formats you need a Canon UW printer driva for the Specie model you are using How to Use Help You can display te Help describing the driver setting Hema through the Printing Preferences screen of the Canon L printer driver To vie al deecriptons of a tah Click the Help bution on each lab A dialog box opens displaying a Gescipiion ofeach item on the tab You can also click fhe link found in te description of an iam bo dapa a desciption of hie intad dialog box T gaa a description for each Hem Right dick the Rem vou wanl ta beam abouli and then cick Help Atomatvety the ES Hep bution is found af the right end of thee Oe bar click that button and then dick ihe item you want to leam about A description ofthe iem is displayed Related Topic Howls Open the Prater Driver Setup Winde When you click a title displayed in the Contents pane found to the left of the on screen manual the pages of that title are displayed in the explanation window on the right side When you click E found to the left of the titles found in the lower hierarchies are displayed EE Note Click Eet to close or display the Contents pane Page top Operating the Explanation Window Page 95 of
403. tion Software gt Adjust the Colors of Photo gt Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns You can print a pattern of an image and adjust the brightness contrast of the image based on the pattern 1 Check that the photo you want to print is displayed in the bottom right area of the screen EA Note m See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 Click Color Adjustment in the Printer Settings window EET ranan Eam akn ha ifs Canon Eary PhetePrint Pro ple Yew Hep TETA EE Number of imager 4 Paper Size dod Media Type Photo Paper Pius isicasy I The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Click Pattern Print Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns Page 247 of 539 pages Coler Adjustment e Corechon Colar Managemen BlackAWwhie Color Balance The Pattern Print window appears 4 Select Brightness Contrast for Pattern Print Patton Pang S etireag Deg the puton methn Sher whia frame bo mgn ther prin iene Dsg the whia lines bo mage thes pint eae 5 Select Paper Size and Pattern Size EE Note You can crop the image before printing the pattern Move the white frame in Preview to change the cropping area Click Preview to display the print preview in a different window in which you can check the settings before printing See Help for details on the P
404. tive products may change without prior announcement Page Sizes You can use the following sizes of paper You can load paper of the following sizes in the Rear Tray A3 13 x 19 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 Letter Legal 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm Tabloid Wide 4 x 7 1 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 10 x 12 25 x 30 cm and envelopes You can load paper of the following sizes in the Front Tray A3 18 x 19 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 Letter Legal 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm Tabloid Wide 4 x 7 1 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 10 x 12 25 x 30 cm and 14 x 17 36 x 43 cm In Macintosh Choukei 3 and Choukei 4 are not available Standard sizes Letter 8 50 x 11 00 inches 215 9 x 279 4 mm Legal 8 50 x 14 00 inches 215 9 x 355 6 mm 11 x 17 Tabloid 11 00 x 17 00 inches 279 4 x 431 8 mm Ad 5 83 x 8 27 inches 148 0 x 210 0 mm A4 8 27 x 11 69 inches 210 0 x 297 0 mm A3 11 69 x 16 54 inches 297 0 x 420 0 mm A3 13 00 x 19 00 inches 329 0 x 483 0 mm B5 7 17 x 10 12 inches 182 0 x 257 0 mm B4 10 12 x 14 33 inches 257 0 x 364 0 mm 4 x 6 4 00 x 6 00 inches 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 4 00 x 8 00 inches 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 5 00 x 7 00 inches 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 8 00 x 10 00 inches 20 x 25 cm 10 x 12 1
405. to prepare two sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper Note Aligning the Print Head without a computer You can also align the Print Head from the printer itself using the RESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and load two sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 2 Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it and pull out the Front Tray Extension If the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the Power lamp flashes green four times then release it immediately The print head alignment pattern will be printed and the printer will adjust the print head position automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the print head alignment pattern VVindows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load two sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray D Important You cannot feed paper from the Front Tray for aligning the Print Head Load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Front Tray gently and pull out the Front Tray Extension Gently press the upper center of the Front Tray to open it D Important f the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 5 Adjust the print head position 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Print Head Alignment Aligning the Print Hea
406. to set a DVD CD appears Note You can adjust the printing position on the DVD CD in the Adjust dialog box To display the Adjust dialog box click W5 Adjust Print Area Print Position You can specify advanced Photo Print settings number of copies print quality etc in the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click f Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page 180 of 539 pages Page top Printing Photos in Grayscale Page 181 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Photos in Grayscale Easy PhotoPrint EX lt Printing Photos in Grayscale Select the Grayscale Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to print photos in grayscale 2 Pie P ian a Print Ble Eit Ven Seleckthe pinter tour then sebezi the sine and lyze of paper tow printing Exif Print etc Cam reson Rea E Phote Plates Flecuction Sees Ria Presto Pape Piol aga hig an Fia jieti AL Glory Pho Pacer Metts Phofn Pipes D Important Vivid Photo is not available when the Grayscale Photo checkbox is selected White streaks may appear at the top and bottom edges of grayscale photos In that case print with a 45 mm 1 77 inch or more margin at the top and bottom edges If you select Bordered Margin 45 from the layouts in the Layout Print
407. tos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays w Important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited calendar It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again Saving EE Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Editing Page 133 of 539 pages Page top Printing Page 134 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Printing Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Se file Edit Yew Help Check cviendar grit settings Create Calendar Chet the Pring peiton be pring with the garent petimi Prinking shart ae Preta Canon OK Copies Paper gia Ad Pagar Spa Rear Tray Meda Type Photo Paper Pius Glossy il r Print Qualty Standard E Page Setup e ia RAA EE A LUTAN r Lei DE Y ee ee Ep x i Dordariess Preting a Edit aD Print Settings 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Ee Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the pa
408. trong light Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and then adjust your operating environment and or the position of the printer so that the Paper Output Slot is not exposed directly to strong light After carrying out the above measures if the problem Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Twelve flashes The paper is not loaded correctly in the Front Tray Thirteen flashes Ink level cannot be detected Fourteen flashes Ink tank cannot be recognized Fifteen flashes Ink tank cannot be recognized Page 390 of 539 pages continues after aligning the Print Head again press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and then perform Manual Print Head Alignment Manual Print Head Alignment When printing the nozzle check pattern or performing Manual Print Head Alignment Other than A4 Letter sized paper is loaded Press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to clear the error and load A4 Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray Then try performing again When performing an ordinary print job e Press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to clear the error Then check the Page Size setting in the Page Setup sheet Windows or the Page Setup dialog box Macintosh in the printer driver and load paper that is the same size as the setting and try printing again e If this error occurs even when the paper loaded in the printer is the same as the setting set the printer driver not to detect the width of the pa
409. ts to Photos You can attach comments to images and display them in your album The photo name shooting date and comments are displayed from top to bottom in a comment box eo Important You cannot attach comments to Photo Print Calendar Stickers and Layout Print i Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click laa Edit Image or double click the image Click the Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box W iShow comment box R Show image name Image Name IMGO032_s jog Show commeris Comments W Show capture date Fount Arial Calor For Se Center Postion From Left of Page 159 5 mm 42 05 mm From Top of Page 63 2 a mm Height 42 05 mm Select the Show comment box checkbox Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display and enter comments Set the size and color of font and position of the comments etc then click OK Attaching Comments to Photos Page 209 of 539 pages Note See Help for details on comments Page top Adding Text to Photos Page 210 of 539 pages Advanced uide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Adding Text to Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Adding Text to Photos You can add text to photos Click L EE Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The scre
410. u E Ed Scaniimport photos or documents T Print photos or albums etc i One Click to Phote Print Sid Print OVD labels Change settings or find solutions to Ee Go to a web page full of fun sia problems ready to use materials 4 Register online Gethelp for your Canon product or software Login online 29 Find information on Canon products How to Use This Screen Pointto a buton on the screen to display the description of each function To use a function click the conaspanding bution Click the buttons on the title barto change the screen size Start Solution Menu when Windows starts ie Important The number and types of buttons displayed in the window may vary depending on your printer and region Starting Solution Menu AS Click Here Solution Menu To start from desktop see below Double click the Canon Solution Menu icon on the desktop Alternatively from the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Solution Menu gt Solution Menu From the next time Solution Menu starts when Windows starts If the Start Solution Menu when Windows starts checkbox at the bottom left of the window is not selected Solution Menu does not start when Windows starts E Note Solution Menu will start automatically when you install it using the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer Changing the Window Size Click io window size large or oa window size small on the
411. u can also set Page Size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the paper size Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab Fhag Paper Fro M Lome ppa T 215 Srp Lengd stapling Leh 3 Select Orientation Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation Check Rotate 180 degrees check box if you want to perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees 4 Complete the setup Click OK The document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation Page top Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 261 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Default Setting Print from Last Page The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the number of copies to be printed For Copies on the Page Setup tab specify the number of copies to be printed EF ak Sep E Man EA Page Setup gf ects fi Martenance El Page Spe Latier 2 57 11 a Onentation a S Porm A Lr a Fatt 180 degrees Piel
412. uch as a USB hub disconnect it connect the printer directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 3 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in the Print dialog box m Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh ET Error Number 1281 Is Displayed e Check Is the Front Tray up when printing from the Rear Tray starts Return the Front Tray to its normal printing position make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer to resume printing Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to return the Front Tray to its normal printing position MESEJ Error Number 1283 Is Displayed e Check If the Front Tray is pulled up while printing from the Rear Tray return the Front Tray to its normal printing position then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer and try printing again Refer to Loading Paper for details about how to return the Front Tray to its normal printing position Do not move the Front Tray during printing HE Error Number 1284 Is Displayed e Check If the Front Tray is pulled down while printing from the Front Tray return the Front Tray to the Front Paper Feeding Position then press the RESUME CANCEL button
413. up e Check 2 Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected according to the media type and printing data referring to the table in Check 1 Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing If you notice blurs or uneven colors increase the print quality setting and try printing again Note You cannot change the print quality setting from a PictBridge compliant device e Check 3 If the problem is not resolved there may be other causes See also the sections below Cannot Print to End of Job No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Lines Are Misaligned Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page top Cannot Print to End of Job Page 398 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Cannot Print to End of Job Cannot Print to End of Job e Check 1 Is the size of the print data extremely large indows Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 2 Is the space of your computer s hard disk sufficient Delete unnecessary files to free disk space Page top No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 399 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Trou
414. ure that your printer s name is selected in Printer 3 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu 4 Select the media type of the loaded paper in Media Type Here we select Plain Paper Note f you select the wrong media type the printer may not print with the proper print quality 5 Select Rear Tray in Paper Source Note To feed paper from the Front Tray select Front Tray in Paper Source 6 Select the print quality in Print Quality Here we select Standard Note For details on the print quality refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide ma HEIA rink Praia Tirei Een Graphi hb rirhraj Note For details on the printer driver functions click Question on the Quality amp Media Color Options Special Effects Borderless Printing or Margin screen to view the on screen manual Advanced Guide If the on screen manual is not installed it does not appear even if Question is clicked To display the preview to confirm the print result click Preview Some software applications may not have a preview function 7 Start printing Click Print to start printing Note Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress click Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list click Stop Jobs f prin
415. us Page 56 of 539 pages IJ Printer Utility Macintosh Lol riled ifaw we Leer fuente fh A OY Po a aN pae a ET TT SY Dimas Fe eee EL T E he j 7 Cito lech rim Hips Prk m m k m bib eee ee fee Pe ri ie S es E P i Press he Ahsan ich harien mh eee Oe elie Se Tee jah fare Pree tee U pdi bolion bo treth Lhe curred i remaina ie eel ink Paani D abak iui A Check if any symbol appears on the screen The ink with Ink low is running low You can continue printing for a while but we recommend you to have a new ink tank available Note An error message may appear while printing Confirm the message and take an appropriate action Follow the procedure below to open each of the confirmation screens 1 Open the printer driver setup window see Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 2 Click View Printer Status on the Maintenance sheet To confirm the ink tank information click the Ink Details menu Note You can also display the printer status monitor by clicking Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name which appears on the taskbar while printing 1 Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box See Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 2 Select Ink Level Information in the pop up menu To confirm the ink tank information click Ink Details O Page top When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors
416. usting Tone Adjusting Tone When printing black and white photos you can produce the cooling effects of cool colors and the warming effects of warm colors Tone is set to Cool Tone is set to standard Tone is set to Warm The procedure for adjusting tone is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab 3 Set grayscale printing Check the Grayscale Printing check box Fiia Pager Fro ff Leer 8 S211 215 S279 4m 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Adjusting monochrome tones Moving the Tone slider to the right brings out the warm colors Warm and moving it to the left brings out the cool colors Cool You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting the tones click OK Adjusting Tone Page 302 of 539 pages i ABCDEF x 1234567 6 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab The color document is converted to grayscale data with adjusted tones It allows you to print the color document in monochrome Note f white streaks appear at the top and bottom of the paper when you print black and white photos use your application software to set top and bottom margins of at least 45 mm 1 77 inch in t
417. ustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Click the Color Management tab Corector Col Management Colu Mode Enable IOC Frotile Finke Profile Auto Rendering Intent Felative Colorimetic 4 Select Photo Color for Color Mode Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Page 226 of 539 pages Color Adjustment Correction Color Management Color Mode Auto A Rerdermg Irteri Relat we Colonmetic Lok Cancel Hele 5 Click OK 6 Click Print The Print dialog box appears 7 Click OK Note You can also change the color balance brightness and contrast of the image Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Contrast Page top Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Page 227 of 539 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Beautiful Photos gt Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing According to the Lighting in the Viewing Environment You can print in color tones suitable for the lighting conditions of the places where images are viewed displayed or exhibited by using a function that reduces the differences in the way images appear in different lighting conditions D Important You may not be able to print with this setting depending on the printer and media type EE Note This function is supported under
418. ut or may not eject properly Page 52 of 539 pages Replacing an Ink Tank Page 53 of 539 pages 2 Hold the orange protective cap E as indicated in the figure below then twist and remove it from the bottom of the ink tank Remove the protective cap while holding it to prevent the ink from staining your fingers Discard the protective cap once it is removed D Important Do not touch the electrical contacts F on the ink tank It can cause the printer to malfunction or become unable to print w Important f you shake the ink tank the ink may spill out and stain your hands and the surrounding area Be careful to handle the ink tank Do not squeeze the side of ink tanks as this may cause the ink to leak out Be careful not to stain your hands and the surrounding area with ink on the removed protective cap Do not reattach the protective cap once you have removed it Discard it according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables Do not touch the open ink port once the protective cap is removed as this may prevent the ink from being ejected properly 5 Install the new ink tank 1 Insert the front end of ink tank into the Print Head at a slant Make sure that the position of the ink tank matches the label Replacing an Ink Tank Page 54 of 539 pages 2 Press the mark Push on the ink tank until the ink tank snaps firmly into place Make sure that the ink lamp li
419. vanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Beautiful Photos gt Printing with ICC Profiles Adobe RGB sRGB Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing with ICC Profiles Adobe RGB sRGB By specifying an ICC profile you can print an image captured in Adobe RGB or sRGB mode by utilizing its Original color space or print in colors that are close to those corrected with Adobe Photoshop or Digital Photo Professional 1 Start Easy PhotoPrint Pro and select the photo you want to print The photo appears in the bottom right area of the screen EE Note See Selecting a Photo for details on how to select photos 2 In the Printer Settings window click Color Adjustment The Color Adjustment dialog box appears 3 Click the Color Management tab Color Adjustment Correction Color Managemen Cole Mode Enable ICC Frolile Finke Profile Auto Rendering Inter Relative Colorimetiic 4 Select Enable ICC Profile for Color Mode 5 Select Auto for Printer Profile Note For Auto the most suitable profile is selected automatically based on the selected printer paper and print quality You can also select a specific ICC profile 6 Select the desired matching method from Rendering Intent EE Note Relative Colorimetric Converts the image to the printer color space in a way that the source colors within the color gamut of the target
420. vary depending on what you create Gerad ees H eh Pet Ae a Sees p gtd bootie ete Ey capp Postion Select the target and source images you want to swap then click Swap When you finish swapping all images you want to swap click Back to Edit Page top Page 203 of 539 pages Replacing Photos Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Replacing Photos Replacing Photos You can replace an image with another image Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen then click Hacs Imager Imooried Images gf f PHDOCI AJH HENW Sie Edit Took eaa I mignon sinn mesno aisa GNA sina EE me Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the Replace Image dialog box Select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window on the right of the screen and click OK If you want to select from the images already imported click the Imported Images tab and select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK y Important You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box E Note a f you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function all the images selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog box a When images are re
421. vertically or upside down as the ink may leak and damage the printer Keep ink tanks out of the reach of children In case ink is accidentally licked or swallowed rinse out mouth or give one or two glasses of water to drink If irritation or discomfort occurs obtain medical advice immediately In case ink gets in contact with eyes rinse with water immediately In case ink gets in contact with skin wash with soap and water immediately If irritation to eyes or skin persists obtain medical advice immediately Do not shake Print Heads or ink tanks Ink may leak out and stain clothing or the surrounding area Never touch the electrical contacts on a Print Head after printing The metal parts may be very hot and could cause burns Do not throw ink tanks into fire Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the Print Head and ink tanks Do not handle the Print Head and ink tanks roughly such as applying them excessive pressure or dropping them Do not rinse or wipe the Print Head and ink tanks Once you have installed the Print Head and ink tanks do not remove them unnecessarily Note when you place the printer near other electrical appliances such as fluorescent lamps Place the printer at least 5 91 inches 15 cm away from other electrical appliances such as fluorescent lamps If the printer is placed closer to those it may not be able to work properly due to fluorescent noises When you disconnect the po
422. w the procedure below to perform Manual Print Head Alignment to precisely align the Print Head For details on performing Automatic Print Head Alignment see Routine Maintenance Note Be sure to load paper in the Rear Tray The Front Tray cannot be used for Manual Print Head Alignment Close the Inner Cover if it is open 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Load two sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Gently press the mark on the Front Tray to open the Front Tray and extend the Front Tray Extension 4 Print the pattern 1 Open the printer properties dialog box Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Start Menu Click the Maintenance tab then Custom Settings Select the Align heads manually check box then click Send Confirm the displayed message and click OK In the Maintenance sheet click Print Head Alignment Ooo A OOD Confirm the displayed message and click Align Print Head D Important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress Note Clicking Print Alignment Value prints the current settings and finishes Print Head Alignment 7 After the pattern is printed click Yes The dialog for entering a print head alignment value is displayed 5 Look at the first printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column A that has the least noticeable ve
423. wer plug When you disconnect the power plug always press the Power button and be sure that the Power lamp in green has gone out If you disconnect the power plug from the power outlet when the Power lamp lights or flashes the Print Head cannot be protected and you may not be able to print later Page top Overview of the Printer Page 6 of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Overview of the Printer Overview of the Printer This section shows the component names of the printer and describes their functions Main Components Front View Rear View Inside View Page top Main Components Page of 539 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Overview of the Printer gt Main Components Main Components m Front View Rear View m Inside View E Front View 1 Top Cover Open to replace the ink tanks or to remove jammed paper inside the printer 2 Paper Guide Slide to align with the left side of the paper stack 3 Rear Tray Load various sizes or types of paper which you can use on the printer Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loaded at the same time and fed automatically one sheet at a time See Loading Paper in the Rear Tray and Media Types You Can Use 4 Paper Support Open to load paper in the Rear Tray 5 Feed Slot Cover Prevents anything from falling into the Feed Slot Open it to slide the Paper Guide and close it before printing 6 Inner Cover Close i
424. whitest part Emphasize Makes colors of flowers etc more vivid Reduce Reduces redness of skin etc Color Tone Adjustment You can adjust the color tones of the entire image by rotating the hue without changing the Adjusting Colors before Printing Page 529 of 539 pages colors of the darkest blackest part gray axis and brightest whitest part adjustment Makes skin tones yellower adjustment Makes skin tones redder Color Balance Adjustment You can adjust the colors of the entire image by shifting midtone colors without changing the colors of the darkest blackest and brightest whitest parts You can reduce the blueness of bluish images such as a shadowy area under blue sky by adjusting the color to be yellower or redder When the colors of captured images are different from human memory colors pure white of wedding dresses red of tomatoes etc you can adapt those colors to be closer to memory colors M magenta direction Previous Adjusting Colors before Printing Page 530 of 539 pages Page top Printing in Grayscale Page 531 of 539 pages Photo Printing Guide Canon hoto Printing Guide gt Printing in Grayscale nting in Grayscale Printing Digital Photos in Grayscale Printing Grayscale Photos from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing Grayscale Photos from Other Applications Page top Printing Digital Photos in Grayscale Page 532
425. wipe them off after the printing surface has dried e 12cm DVD CD 1 Remove the disc from the CD R Tray e 8cm DVD CD 1 Remove the 8 cm CD R Adapter from the CD R Tray e Storing the CD R Tray You can keep the CD R Tray in the Storage Compartment located at the center of the bottom of printer Insert the CD R Tray straight D Important The CD R Tray cannot be used if it becomes warped Be sure to keep the CD R Tray on Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page 343 of 539 pages a flat place Page top Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Page 344 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs The CD R Tray supplied allows the printing of images on printable DVD CDs CD LabelPrint is bundled application software that allows you to edit and modify data before printing Install it on your computer to use it Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer E Note We recommend that you test print on an unneeded printable DVD CD first Page top Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer Page 345 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer e CD LabelPrint is bundled applicati
426. with high color rendering properties good color appearance used for color evaluation comparison inspection etc where accurate color management is required 5000K is often used for evaluation of printed materials Triphosphor fluorescent lamp Lamp widely used for general household lighting Normal fluorescent lamp Lamp with low color rendering properties poor color appearance compared to high color rendering lamps or triphosphor lamps Select a higher K value for a cooler tint and select a lower K value for a warmer tint 6 Click OK 7 Click Print The Print dialog box appears 8 Click OK Note You can also change the color balance brightness and contrast of the image Adjusting the Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Contrast Page top Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro Page 229 of 539 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing with Easy PhotoPrint Pro Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint Pro 2 Selecting a Photo 3 Selecting the Paper and Layout 4 Printing Adjust the Colors of Photo Printing Photos in Grayscale m Adjusting the Color Balance m Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Adjusting Brightness Contrast m Adjusting Brightness Contrast Using Sample Patterns Try This Printing Borderless Photos Printing an Index m Printing Contact Sheets
427. ws and Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Routine Maintenance The ink tank is not compatible with this printer The lamp on the ink tank is off Install an appropriate ink tank Routine Maintenance An Ink tank error has occurred The lamp on the ink tank is off Replace the ink tank Routine Maintenance Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Sixteen flashes Ink has run out Nineteen flashes An unsupported USB hub is connected Page 391 of 539 pages Ink has run out The lamp on the ink tank flashes Replace the ink tank and close the Top Cover Printing under the current condition may damage the printer If you want to continue printing in this condition you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level Press and hold the RESUME CANCEL button for at least 5 seconds and then release it With this operation releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble which may be caused by continuation of printing under the ink out condition Routine Maintenance Note If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled the remaining ink level is not displayed correctly on the printer status monitor Windows and Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Routine Maintenance If a PictBridge compliant device is connected via a USB hub remove the hub and connect it directly to the
428. xif images captured with a digital camera using the sYCC color space that is larger than the SRGB color space Utilizing Characteristics of Compressed Data Check2 How can print SRGB images using the color correction function of the driver You can print SRGB images in popular color tones with Canon Digital Photo Color using the color correction function of the driver Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing with Canon s Unique Color Tones Printing from Other Applications Fo Check3 How can edit retouch sRGB images and print the resulting images You can edit retouch sRGB images and print the resulting images Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Printing from Other Applications Previous Page top Printing from Computers Page 479 of 539 pages Photo Printing Guide Canon Photo Printing Guide gt Printing from Computers inting from Computers Overview of Printing from Computers Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Printing from Other Applications Points to Check in the Digital Camera Settings Points to Check in the Application Settings Printing from Easy PhotoPrint Pro Case 1 Printing by Utilizing the Source Color Space Case 2 Edit Retouch sRGB Images and Print the Resulting Images Case 3 Printing with Canon s Unique Col
429. y printing again 1 If the page size you want to use is not displayed open the File menu of the application and select Print Then make sure that the name of your printer is selected 2 Make sure that the paper selected for Media Type in the Main sheet Windows or the Print dialog box Macintosh in the printer driver matches the paper loaded in the printer 3 Make sure that the Page Size setting in the Page Setup sheet Windows or the Paper size setting in the Page Setup dialog box Macintosh in the printer driver is the same as the size set in step 1 e Check 10 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in the Print dialog box The printer will not print properly if you are using a driver for a different printer In Windows make sure that your printer s name is selected in the Print dialog box In Macintosh make sure that your printer s name is selected in Printer in the Print dialog box Note To make the printer the one selected by default select Set as Default Printer Windows Default Printer or Make Default Macintosh e Check 11 Configure the printer port appropriately Configure USBnnn where n is a number as the printer port 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Click Control Panel then Printer under Hardware and Sound In Windows XP click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 click Control Panel then Printers 3 Rig
430. zzles Used ink for nozzle cleaning is limited to a small amount Does black and white printing use color ink The use of each ink varies depending on the color of image to be printed or the contents of document Black and white printing may also use ink other than black ink So color ink is consumed even when printing in black and white Ink lamp indicates when ink is running low The inside of the ink tank consists of A the part where ink is preserved and B the sponge with absorbed ink A B When the ink A runs out the ink lamp flashes slowly to indicate that the ink is running low Then when the ink B runs out the ink lamp flashes fast to indicate that the ink tank needs to be replaced with a new one See Replacing an Ink Tank E Printing on special paper How to print with optimal quality Tip Check the printer status before printing Is the Print Head OK If print head nozzles are clogged print will be faint and papers will be wasted Print the nozzle check pattern to check the Print Head See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Is the inside of the printer smeared with ink After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing the area where papers go through may get smeared with ink Clean the inside of your printer with Bottom Plate Cleaning Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Tip Check how to load the paper correctly

Data Sheet

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents